2010 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Seats and Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Features and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
the name EXPRESS are registered trademarks
of General Motors.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
This manual describes features that may or may not
be on your specific vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase documentation relating
to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features
found on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list
of what is in the manual and the page number where it
can be found.
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, refer
to the DURAMAX® Diesel supplement for additional and
specific information on this engine.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25830408 B Second Printing
©2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this
happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information relating
to a specific component, control, message, gauge,
or indicator.
WARNING:
{
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
+ : Fuses
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1 In Brief
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑17.
L. Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
B. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑37.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4‑4.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑21.
F. Shift Lever. See Starting the Engine on page 3‑25.
G. Climate Control System on page 4‑15.
H. Audio System(s) on page 4‑59.
M. Horn on page 4‑3.
N. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑79.
O. Tow/Haul Mode Button. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
under Towing a Trailer on page 5‑30.
P. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑14.
Q. StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑5 (If Equipped).
R. Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑69.
S. Storage Areas on page 3‑46.
I. Exterior Lamps on page 4‑9.
T. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑25.
U. Rear Heating System on page 4‑18 (If Equipped).
J. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑11.
K. Cruise Control on page 4‑6. Fast Idle System
(If Equipped). See Duramax Diesel Manual for
more information.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Drive Information
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
Press K again within five seconds to unlock all
remaining doors.
Press j to unlock only the cargo doors.
Press Q to lock all doors.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
Press L and release to locate the vehicle.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 20 m (65 feet) away from
the vehicle.
Press L and hold for more than two seconds to sound
the panic alarm.
Press L again to cancel the panic alarm.
Press K to unlock the
driver door.
See Keys on page 3‑3 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4.
Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press Q .
Door Locks
Manual Door Locks
Lock and unlock the door
from the outside using
the key or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, if available.
From the inside, slide the
manual lever on the door
up or down.
3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and
hold / until the turn signal lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
The doors will be locked and the climate control system
may come on.
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat
the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start
can be extended only once.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start:
.
See Door Locks on page 3‑9.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and hold / until the parking lamps turn off.
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
located on the doors.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
.
Turn the ignition on and then back off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑7.
T : Press to lock and unlock the doors.
See Power Door Locks on page 3‑10.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
Manual Windows
Operate the manual windows by turning the hand crank
on each door to raise or lower the side door windows.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
See Manual Windows on page 3‑16.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Power Windows
If the vehicle has power
windows, the controls are
located on each of the
side doors. The driver
door also has a control
to operate the front
passenger window.
Try to move the seat to be sure the seat is locked in
place.
See Manual Seats on page 2‑2.
Press or pull up on the switch to lower or raise the
window.
See Power Windows on page 3‑17.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
If the vehicle has front power seat(s), the controls are
located at the front center of the seat cushion.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever on the inboard side of the
seats.
Adjust the seat by moving the center knob up, down,
right or left.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
Raise and lower the front or rear of the seat cushion by
moving the right or left lever up or down.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
See Power Seat on page 2‑3.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑4.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt
Airbag On-Off Switch
If the instrument panel has one of the switches pictured
in the following illustrations, the vehicle has an airbag
on-off switch that you can use to manually turn on or off
the right front passenger airbag.
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2‑10.
United States
Canada
.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2‑15.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑69 for important
information.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑24.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑41
.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system, if equipped, will turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbag and roof‐rail airbags,
if equipped, are not affected by this.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Vehicles with outside manual mirrors can be adjusted
by moving the mirror up and down or left to right so you
can see a little of the side of your vehicle, and have a
clear view of objects behind you.
If the vehicle has a passenger sensing system, the
passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle is started.
Vehicles with outside
power mirrors have
controls located on the
driver side door.
United States
Canada
Select each mirror by turning the knob clockwise for the
passenger side mirror or counterclockwise for the driver
side mirror. Adjust the mirror angle by moving the knob
in the desired direction.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑73 for
important information.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles with towing
Steering Wheel Adjustment
mirrors can be adjusted
manually for a clear view
of the objects behind you.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
Interior Mirror
For vehicles with a tilt steering wheel, the lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind the vehicle. Adjust the mirror
to avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Push the tab,
located at the base of the mirror, forward for daytime
use and pull it for nighttime use.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever to move the steering wheel up or
down into a comfortable position.
2. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in
place.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on page 3‑44.
See Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reading Lamps
Interior Lighting
For vehicles with reading lamps, press the button
located next to each lamp to turn it on or off.
Dome Lamp
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
To manually turn on the dome lamps, turn the
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or
closed.
For more information on interior lighting, see:
.
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑11.
.
Entry/Exit Lighting on page 4‑13.
Exterior Lighting
E: The dome lamp override button is located next to
the exterior lamps control.
The exterior lamps
control is located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off
when a door is opened. Press the button again to return
it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come
on when a door is opened.
O : Briefly turn the control to this position to turn the
automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps (DRL)
off or back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position only
works for vehicles that are shifted into the P (Park)
position.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO: Automatically turns on the headlamps, parking
lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, and license
plate lamps.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
;: Turns on the parking lamps, taillamps, instrument
panel lights, and license plate lamps.
2: Turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps,
instrument panel lights, and license plate lamps.
For more information, see:
.
Exterior Lamps on page 4‑9.
.
Headlamps on Reminder on page 4‑10.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4‑10.
.
Automatic Headlamp System on page 4‑11.
The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
8: Use for a single wiping cycle.
6 : Turn the band to adjust the delay time between
wipes. Turn the band up or down for more frequent
wipes or less frequent wipes.
d : Slow wipes.
a : Fast wipes.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9: Turns the wipers off.
L: Push the paddle on top of the multifunction lever to
spray washer fluid on the windshield.
See Windshield Wipers on page 4‑5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑6.
Climate Controls
The vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be
controlled with these systems.
Vehicles With Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
B. Temperature
Control
D. Rear Window
Defogger
See Climate Control System on page 4‑15. See Rear
Heating System on page 4‑18 (If Equipped) or Rear Air
Conditioning and Heating System on page 4‑18
(If Equipped).
Vehicles Without Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 : Press to display additional text information related to
the current FM-RDS station or MP3 song. A choice of
additional information such as: Channel, Song, Artist,
and CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the softkey located
under any one of the tabs and the information about
that tab displays.
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Audio System(s) on page 4‑59.
Storing a Favorite Station
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
For vehicles with a FAV button, a maximum of
36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six
softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs
and by using the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go
through up to six pages of favorites, each having six
favorite stations available per page. Each page of
favorites can contain any combination of AM and
FM stations.
Radio with CD (MP3)
O : Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to choose between FM and AM.
f : Select radio stations.
If the radio does not have a FAV button, up to
18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be
programmed on the six numbered buttons.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
See Radio(s) on page 4‑63.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Clock
Steering Wheel Controls
To set the time and date for the Radio with CD (MP3):
If equipped, these
controls are located on
the right side of the
steering wheel.
1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located below any one of the
tabs that you want to change.
3. Increase or decrease the time or date, depending
on the radio, by pressing the © SEEK ¨ arrows,
s \ REV/FWD buttons or by turning f
clockwise or counterclockwise.
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your
specific audio system, see Setting the Clock on
page 4‑61
.
w / x : Press to seek radio stations or select tracks on
Portable Audio Devices
a CD. Press and hold to scan radio stations.
g : Press to mute the audio system. Press again to
This vehicle may have an auxiliary input jack, located
on the audio faceplate. External devices such as iPod®,
MP3 players, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary
input jack using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack cable.
cancel mute.
+ e − e : Increases or decreases volume.
SRCE : Press to choose between the radio, CD, and
auxiliary input jack.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” under Radio(s) on
page 4‑63
.
¨ : Press to seek the next radio station, or the next
track or chapter while sourced to the CD.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left
side of the steering wheel.
The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets
located on the instrument panel.
To use the accessory power outlet lift the cover.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑14 and
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on page 4‑15
(If Equipped).
J: On/Off.
RES+: Press to resume or accelerate speed.
SET−: Press to set or decrease speed.
[ : Press to cancel cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
For more information, see Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).
Performance and Maintenance
StabiliTrak®
The vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin and the StabiliTrak system that assists
with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. Both systems turn on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
The Tire Pressure Monitor
alerts you when a
significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
.
To turn off both traction control and Electronic
Stability Control, press and hold d until d
illuminates and the appropriate DIC message
displays. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is
corrected. The proper tire pressures for your vehicle are
listed on the Tire and Loading Information label located
on the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Loading
page 4‑44
.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on both
systems.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System on
page 5‑5
the Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
Note: The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about
low tire pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly
tire maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressures.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Vehicles that have the 4.8L V8 engine (VIN Code A),
the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 4), or the 6.0L V8 engine
(VIN Code G) and the N15 flexible fuel option have a
yellow fuel cap and can use either unleaded gasoline
or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 6‑8. In all other
engines, use only the unleaded gasoline described
under Gasoline Octane on page 6‑7.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑67 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑68.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message
when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset to 100% only
following an oil change.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
Roadside Assistance Program
U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained advisors who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, minor repair
information or towing arrangements.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
.
When road and weather conditions are
appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped.
.
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
Online Owner Center
.
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
.
Combine several trips into a single trip.
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC
Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near
the size.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
.
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2 Seats and Restraint System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (With Airbag On-Off Switch) . . . 2-55
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Rear Seat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . 2-67
Airbag Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . 2-78
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Head Restraints
On vehicles with factory installed seats, the front seats
have built-in head restraints that are not adjustable in
the outboard seating positions.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
WARNING:
{
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has front power seat(s), the controls are
located at the front center of the seat cushion.
Power Seat
To raise or lower the seat, move the center knob up or
down. To move the seat forward or rearward, move the
center knob toward the right or left.
To raise or lower the front of the seat cushion, move the
right lever up or down. To raise or lower the rear of the
seat cushion, move the left lever up or down.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the inboard side of
the seats.
Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING:
{
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
WARNING:
{
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
WARNING:
{
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Removing the Rear Seat
Disconnect the quick release latch plates for the
lap‐shoulder belts on the bench seat to be removed.
1. To do this, press the
tip of a key into the
release hole of the
safety belt buckle
while pulling up on
the safety belt.
Three Passenger Seat Shown
The driver side pin has a gray cap with a black “L”
marked on it.
2. Locate the pins.
On a three passenger seat there are two pins
located on the inboard sides of the rear seats.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pull the pin handle up to disengage the pin from
the retaining clip, then pull the pin out.
4. Repeat this procedure for the other pins.
5. Pull the seat rearward about 2 inches (5 cm) and
then lift the seat from the floor rails.
6. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
7. For the first row rear
seat, stow the safety
belt latch by attaching
the clip on the safety
belt latch to the trim
just inside the
side door.
Three Passenger Seat Shown
The passenger side pin has a black cap with a
white “R” marked on it.
On a four passenger seat, each half of the seat
has a set of pins. The driver side has a set marked
“L”, and the passenger side has a set marked “R”.
For the remaining rear seats, stow the safety belt
latch plate on the clip at the window trim.
If the vehicle has floor mats, the pins will be
located under a flap that has been cut into the mat.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing the Rear Seats
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING:
{
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
A seat that is not locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the
seat into place properly when installing it.
1. Position the seat into the open slots in both rails.
Push the seat forward in the rail, hooking both seat
bases onto the pins inside of the rails.
2. Locate the hole in the rail to install the locking pins
at the rear of the seat base. If the vehicle has floor
mats, pull the flap that has been cut into the mat.
WARNING:
{
3. Insert the locking pins into the seat base and push
the seat to line up the pins with the base.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
On a three passenger seat, the pin with the black
cap marked “R” must be installed on the passenger
side and the pin with the gray cap marked “L” on
the driver side.
(Continued)
On a four passenger seat, the pins marked “R”
must be installed on the half of the seat on the
passenger side. The pins marked “L” must be
installed on the half of the seat on the driver side.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three Passenger Seat Shown
Three Passenger Seat Shown
4. Push the pin(s) marked “R” down until they are in
5. Push the pin(s) marked “L” down until they are in
the retaining clip.
the retaining clip.
6. If the vehicle has a floor mat, put the flap back to
its original position.
7. Repeat this procedure for the other seat base.
8. Connect the quick-release latch plates for the
lap-shoulder belts by inserting the latch plates into
the buckles attached at the outboard positions of
the bench seat. Do not twist the belt.
9. Check that all locking pins are locked into place
before operating the vehicle.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
WARNING:
{
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people
to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use safety
belts properly. It also describes some things not to do
with safety belts.
WARNING:
{
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑22
for additional information.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And
you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2‑31 or Infants
and Young Children on page 2‑34. Follow those rules
for everyone's protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
belt. If you are using a rear seating position with a
detachable safety belt and the safety belt is not
attached, see Rear Seat Operation on page 2‑6
for instruction on reconnecting the safety belt to the
mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2‑30
.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the latch
plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is
not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching
on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap
belt on smaller occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the
vehicle.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger positions.
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of the
vehicle is below 8,500 lb (3 855 kg) then the vehicle
has safety belt pretensioners for the front outboard
occupants. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19 to
locate the certification label which contains the GVWR.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be
away from the face and neck, but not falling off of the
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a
crash.
Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if
the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are
met. And, if the vehicle has side impact airbags, safety
belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a
side crash or a rollover event.
To move it down, pull on
the center adjuster control
labeled PULL. You can
move the height adjuster
up just by pushing up on
the shoulder belt guide.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash on page 2‑81.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without pushing in to make sure it has
locked into position.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. If not, they are available through your dealer/
retailer. The guides may provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have outgrown booster
seats and for some adults. When installed and properly
adjusted, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt
away from the neck and head.
1. Locate the guide in a pocket on the side of the
seatback.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage
pocket on the side of the seatback.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use
it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer's instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
.
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2‑24 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
.
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
WARNING:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
{
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑24.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts
properly.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants
and young children ride in vehicles, they should have
the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
WARNING:
{
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING: (Continued)
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child
(Continued)
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
WARNING:
{
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's weight, height, and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
WARNING:
{
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of the
infant.
A young child's hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child's body with
the harness.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
WARNING:
{
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2‑41 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
If a child restraint is secured in the right front passenger
seat, there may be a switch on the instrument panel
to manually turn off the right front passenger airbag.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑69 and Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (With
Passenger Sensing System) on page 2‑51 or Securing
a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
(With Airbag On-Off Switch) on page 2‑55 for more
information, including important safety information.
WARNING:
{
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
Even if the passenger sensing system or airbag
switch has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
(Continued)
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments
on the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and also
the instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether strap and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether always
to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether,
and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not install three child restraints in the same row at
the same time and never install two top tethers using
the same top tether anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
Second, Third and Fourth
Row with Three
Front Passenger Position
Passenger Seat
See the information following for installing a child
restraint with a top tether in the second, third and
fourth row center positions.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The second, third and fourth row with three passenger
seats have exposed metal lower anchors located in the
crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.
Front Passenger Position
There is a top tether anchor for the front passenger
position with a front passenger seat. The anchor is
located at the rear of the seat cushion on the right front
passenger's seat.
Second, Third and Fourth Row with Three
Passenger Seat — Passenger Van
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
There are two top tether anchors in the second, third
and fourth rows. To install a child restraint in the rear
driver side seating positions, use anchor point (A).
To install a child restraint in the rear passenger side
seating positions, use anchor point (B). To install a child
restraint in the rear center seating positions, use anchor
point (B). Never install two top tethers using the same
top tether anchor.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2‑39 for
additional information.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
WARNING:
{
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries during a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
WARNING:
{
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to
secure the restraint, following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
WARNING:
{
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint
has been installed.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts
to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. For the second, third and fourth row with
three passenger seats only, in the rear driver
side seating positions, use anchor point (A).
For the rear passenger side seating
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
positions, use anchor point (B). For the
center seating positions, use anchor
point (B). Never install two top tethers
using the same top tether anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3. Route and tighten the top tether according to
your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are
using has an integrated
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has an integrated
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the headrest
or head restraint.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑41 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in
the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑41 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2‑39.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed
the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may
be helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑41 for
more information.
Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position
(With Passenger Sensing System)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2‑39.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑73 and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 4‑25 for more information,
including important safety information.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING: (Continued)
seat, always move the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑73
for additional information.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑41 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑41 for top tether anchor locations.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front
(Continued)
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 4‑25
.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may
be helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑41 for
more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position
(With Airbag On-Off Switch)
The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2‑39.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If the child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑73 for more information.
There is a switch on the instrument panel that you
can use to turn off the right front passenger's frontal
airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑69 for more
information, including important safety information.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING:
{
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For example, the right
front passenger airbag could inflate even though
the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑23 for more
information, including important safety information.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
Even if the airbag switch has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no system is
fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑41 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑41 for top tether anchor locations.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
If you have no other choice but to install a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make sure
the airbag is off once the child restraint has been
installed.
When the airbag off switch has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator in
the airbag off light should light and stay lit when
the vehicle is started. See Airbag Off Light on
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
page 4‑24
.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed
the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may
be helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑41 for
more information.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbag:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
The vehicle may have the following airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver (cargo van).
.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger
position (cargo or passenger van equipped with a
sliding door).
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
If you have a passenger van with a right front
passenger roof-rail airbag and a sliding door, you
will also have a separate roof-rail airbag for the
passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger and the third row outboard passenger
position.
If you turned the airbag off with the switch, turn on the
right front passenger airbag when you remove the child
restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be
sitting there is a member of a passenger airbag risk
group. See Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑69 for more
information, including important safety information.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver, passenger seated
directly behind the driver, and the third row
outboard passenger position (passenger van
equipped with a sliding or hinged door).
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
WARNING:
{
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger,
passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger, and the third row outboard passenger
position (passenger van equipped with a
hinged door).
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
page 2‑64
.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 2‑31 or Infants and Young Children on
page 2‑34
.
There is an airbag
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
WARNING:
{
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑23 for
more information.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
(Continued)
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
If the vehicle has one, the right front passenger airbag
is in the instrument panel on the passenger side.
The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If the vehicle is a cargo or passenger van with a sliding
door and it has a roof-rail airbag for the driver and right
front passenger position, the roof-rail airbags are in the
ceiling above the side window.
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, passengers behind the driver and right
front passenger, and the third row outboard passengers,
the roof-rail airbags are in the ceiling above the side
windows. On the driver side of the vehicle, there is one
single roof-rail airbag for either vehicles with a hinged
door or a sliding door.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For passenger vans with a sliding door, on the
passenger side of the vehicle, you will have a separate
roof-rail airbag for the passenger seated directly behind
the right front passenger and the third row outboard
passenger position.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce
the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or
right front passenger's head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
WARNING:
{
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast the vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly the vehicle slows down.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
Single Stage vs. Dual Stage Airbags
Depending on the weight of the vehicle, you will have
either “Single Stage Airbags” or “Dual Stage Airbags.”
Vehicles that have a passenger sensing system also
have dual stage airbags. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑25 or Passenger Sensing System
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
on page 2‑73
.
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object that does not
deform.
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of the
vehicle is 8,500 lb (3 855 kg) or above, the vehicle
may have single stage airbags. If the GVWR is below
8,500 lb (3 855 kg) then the vehicle may have dual
stage airbags. You can find the GVWR on the
certification label on the rear edge of the driver door.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19 for more
information.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
.
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
In addition, the vehicle may have dual-stage frontal
airbags. Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint
according to crash severity. The vehicle has electronic
frontal sensors, which help the sensing system
distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and
a more severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal
impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a level less
than full deployment. For more severe frontal impacts,
full deployment occurs.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 2‑59. Roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover. Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system's designed threshold level.
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows for the first, second, and
third rows (if equipped). See Where Are the Airbags?
on page 2‑62 for more information.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts.
All roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side
of the vehicle is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair
costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined
by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact,
and how quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail
airbags, deployment is determined by the location
and severity of the side impact.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑64 for more information.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's
upper body.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑66.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first, second, and third
rows, if equipped. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial
ejection in rollover events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors (if equipped with power door locks), turn
on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers,
and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, and turn off the interior lamps
and the hazard warning flashers by using the controls
for those features.
WARNING:
WARNING:
{
{
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
Airbag Off Switch
If the instrument panel has one of the switches pictured
in the following illustrations, the vehicle has an airbag
on-off switch that you can use to manually turn on or off
the right front passenger airbag.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8‑18 and Event Data Recorders on
page 8‑19
.
.
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
If the vehicle does not have an airbag on-off switch, it
may have a passenger sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑73.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This switch should only be turned to the off position if
the person in the right front passenger position is a
member of a passenger risk group identified by the
national government as follows:
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
.
My vehicle has no rear seat;
.
Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must
ride in the front seat because:
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in the front because no space
is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
.
My vehicle has no rear seat;
.
.
The child has a medical condition which, according
My vehicle has a rear seat too small to
to the child's physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child's condition.
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
.
The infant has a medical condition which,
according to the infant's physician, makes it
necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the child's
condition.
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
.
Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special
risk for the passenger; and
.
Makes the potential harm from the passenger
airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm
from turning off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard
or windshield in a crash.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
If the right front passenger's airbag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and help
protect the person sitting there. Do not turn off the
passenger's airbag unless the person sitting there
is in a risk group.
United States
Canada
To turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag, insert
the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to the off position.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The airbag off light will come on to let you know that the
right front passenger airbag is off. The airbag off light
will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. See
Airbag Off Light on page 4‑24. The airbag off light will
stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. The right
front passenger airbag will remain off until you turn it
back on again.
WARNING:
{
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For example, the right
front passenger airbag could inflate even though
the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
United States
Canada
To turn the right front passenger airbag on again, insert
the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to the on position.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have
the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑23 for more
The right front passenger frontal airbag is now enabled
(may inflate). See Airbag Off Light on page 4‑24 or
more information.
information, including important safety information.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
Passenger Sensing System
If the instrument panel has one of the indicators
pictured in the following illustrations, the vehicle has
a passenger sensing system unless there is an airbag
off switch located on the instrument panel. If there
is an airbag off switch, the vehicle does not have a
passenger sensing system. See Airbag Off Switch on
page 2‑69 for more information.
page 4‑25
.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and roof-rail airbags, if equipped, are
not part of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
United States
Canada
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who
are large enough, using safety belts.
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the instrument panel when the vehicle is started.
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING: (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is
turned off.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
(Continued)
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
.
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
For some children, including those in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
.
The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
.
The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.
.
The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
.
The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
WARNING:
{
child restraints.
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger's seat
may not have the protection of the airbag(s). See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑23 for more
on this, including important safety information.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑25.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing
System) in the Index.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
If no rear seat is available, do not install a child
restraint in this vehicle.
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
This allows the system to detect that person and then
enable the right front passenger frontal airbag.
2-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑79 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing the vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat.
If this is not desired remove the object from the seat.
page 8‑17
.
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat
or between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.
2-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
System on page 2‑73
.
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about
the vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
the vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle's
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 6‑76 for
additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
position, which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim,
or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
2-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4‑23 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑66. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑22 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6‑101
.
2-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during
any crash may have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt
assemblies inspected or replaced.
WARNING:
{
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑23
.
2-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
2-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Swing-Out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Enhanced Technology Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . 3-20
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Automatic Transmission Operation
(Six Speed Automatic Transmission) . . . . . . . . 3-29
Automatic Transmission Operation
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Outside Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Outside Towing Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
(Four Speed Automatic Transmission) . . . . . . 3-34
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
WARNING:
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all door locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store
this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, call Roadside
Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 8‑8
.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
work up to 20 m (65 feet) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
.
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
.
Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
.
If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
Without Remote Start
Shown, With Similar
Q (Lock): Press once to lock all doors. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking
lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The horn may chirp when Q is pressed again within
five seconds. See DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 4‑53 for additional information.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver door. If K is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors
unlock.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The
alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to ON/RUN
The interior lamps come on and stay on for 20 seconds
or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the
DIC, the parking lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking
has occurred. See DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 4‑53 for additional information.
or L is pressed again. The ignition must be in LOCK/
OFF for the panic alarm to work.
Programming Transmitters
to the Vehicle
j (Cargo Door): Press to unlock only the cargo
doors.
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased and programmed through your dealer/
retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is
programmed. Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it. See “Relearn Remote
Key” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑37
for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to
your vehicle.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press Q and then press and hold / within
five seconds to start the engine from outside the vehicle
using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start
on page 3‑7 for additional information.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for additional
information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side of the
transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This button will be on the
RKE transmitter if you have remote start.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote start feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. It may also start the vehicle's heating or air
conditioning systems. See Climate Control System on
page 4‑15 for additional information.
To start the engine using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter's lock button,
then immediately press and hold the remote
vehicle start button for four seconds or until the
vehicle's turn signal lamps flash.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
When the vehicle's engine starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on while the engine
is running. The vehicle's doors will be locked. The
airbag readiness light will be on during a remote
start. It should turn off when the ignition is turned
to ON/RUN. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 4‑23 for more information.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range of
operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is still running, to extend the engine running time
by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended
one time.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4 for additional
information.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
After a remote start, the engine will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been
done or the vehicle's key is inserted into the ignition
switch and turned to ON/RUN.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maximum number of remote starts between ignition
cycles with the key is two.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:
.
The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
If the remote start procedure is used again before the
first 10 minute time frame has ended, the first
10 minutes will immediately expire and the second
10 minute time frame will start.
.
The vehicle's key is in the ignition.
.
The vehicle's hood is open
.
The hazard warning flashers are on.
After your vehicle's engine has been started two times
using the remote start button, the vehicle's ignition
switch must be turned to ON/RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF using the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again.
.
There is an emission control system malfunction.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑30.
.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
.
The oil pressure is low.
To manually shut off the engine after a remote start:
.
Two remote vehicle starts have already been
provided.
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
.
Insert the vehicle's key into the ignition switch and
turn the switch to ON/RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doors and Locks
WARNING: (Continued)
Door Locks
.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
WARNING:
{
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
.
Passengers, especially children, can easily
To lock the door from the
inside, slide the manual
lever on the door down.
To unlock the door, slide
the manual lever up.
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will
not open it. The chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors
are not locked. So, all passengers should
wear safety belts properly and the doors
should be locked whenever the vehicle is
driven.
.
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
From the outside, use the key.
If the vehicle is equipped with keyless entry, see
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4 for
more information.
(Continued)
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
located on the doors.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
T : Press the bottom of the switch to lock all the doors
at once. Press the top of the switch to unlock all the
doors at once.
This feature can be programmed using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK
under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4‑53.
When a door is locked, the inside door handle will
not work.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
The vehicle is programmed so that when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved
out of P (Park), all the doors will lock. The doors will
unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move the
shift lever back into P (Park).
Cargo Door Relocking
If the cargo door is open when the lock button is
pressed on the door or the RKE transmitter, all doors
will lock except the cargo door. The cargo door will only
lock when they are closed or when the delayed locking
feature functions.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are
locked, have that person use the manual lever or power
door lock switch for the rear doors. When the door is
closed again, it will not lock automatically. Use the
manual lever or the power door lock switch to lock
the door.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch and
a door open, the doors will lock five seconds after the
last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal
that the delayed locking feature is in use.
The power door locks can be programmed through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information
on programming, see DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 4‑53
.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the 60/40 side
Automatic Door Lock
The doors will automatically lock when the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park). The automatic door locking
feature cannot be disabled.
swing-out door, move
the button to the right for
the driver side door or to
the left for the passenger
side door to engage the
security feature.
Automatic Door Unlock
The doors will automatically unlock when the shift lever
is moved into P (Park).
The automatic unlock feature can be disabled or
programmed in different ways if the vehicle has an
automatic transmission. For more information on
programming, see DIC Vehicle Customization on
60/40 Swing-Out Side
Door — Driver Side
shown, Passenger Side
similar
page 4‑53
.
Rear Door Security Locks
Security locks are located on the front portion of the
60/40 side swing-out door or the side sliding door.
Move the button to the left for the driver side door or to
the right for the passenger side door to return the door
locks to normal operation.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the side sliding door,
move the button up to
engage the security
Sliding Side Door
feature. Move the button
down to return the door
locks to normal operation.
Side Sliding Door
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking the key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
To open the sliding side door from the outside, pull the
handle toward the rear of the vehicle and slide the
door open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when either the
driver, passenger, or rear door is open, all the doors will
lock and then the driver door will unlock. This feature
does not include the side cargo door.
To close the sliding side door from the outside, use the
handle to slide the door toward the front of the vehicle.
When the door is closed, it will be flush with the side of
the body.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door
To open the sliding side door from the inside, pull the
handle toward the rear of the vehicle. Then, slide the
door toward the rear of the vehicle.
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull out on the handle and open the door.
To close the sliding side door from the inside, grasp the
handle and slide the door toward the front of the
vehicle.
Make sure the door is completely closed before
driving away.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the
inside, pull the handle toward you and push the
door open.
To open the rear portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull the handle on the side of the rear door and
pull the door toward you.
To close the 60/40 side doors, close the rear door first.
Then close the front door. Check to make sure that both
doors are completely closed.
The front side swing-out door has a check strap
assembly in the door frame to keep the door from
opening beyond 90 degrees.
To open the door beyond 90 degrees, close the door
partially, pull the check strap toward you and then open
the door. When the door is closed, the check strap will
automatically re-engage.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the rear doors from the outside, pull the handle
toward you to open the passenger side rear door first.
Rear Doors
WARNING:
{
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
.
Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will
not open it. The chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors
are not locked. So, all passengers should
wear safety belts properly and the doors
should be locked whenever the vehicle is
driven.
.
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
To open the driver side rear door, pull the latch release
at the inside edge of the door.
To close the rear doors, close the driver side rear door
first. Then close the passenger side rear door. Check to
make sure both doors are completely closed.
.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
WARNING:
{
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
Operate the manual windows by turning the hand crank
on each door to raise or lower the side door windows.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has power
windows, the controls are
located on each of the
side doors.
Power Windows
WARNING:
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
The driver door has a switch for the passenger window
also. The power windows will work when the ignition
has been turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3‑24.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Press the switch to lower the window.
Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the
window.
Express‐Down
The driver window switch also has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press fully and release the window
switch marked AUTO to activate the express-down
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
mode. This mode can be cancelled at any time by
pulling up on the switch. To open the window part way,
lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired
position.
Swing-Out Windows
Rear Swing‐Out Windows
The vehicle also has rear swing‐out windows. The rear
swing-out windows work the same way as the side
swing out window, but the latch is located at the bottom
edge of the window.
Side Swing-Out Window
To open the side door swing-out window, pull up on the
latch at the edge of the window. Swing the window out
and push down on the latch to lock the window into
place.
To close the window, pull the latch toward you and push
down on the latch to lock it.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enhanced Technology Glass
Sun Visors
The vehicle may be equipped with Enhanced
Technology Glass (ETG). ETG is part of the overall
occupant protection system on passenger vans. ETG
may help to keep passengers sitting next to these fixed
windows from being ejected through the glass in some,
but not in all crashes. Even with this glass, safety belts
must still be worn at all times. For passenger vans, use
only ETG glass approved for your vehicle for
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. You can
also swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
The vehicle may have visor vanity mirrors, with or
without lamps. Lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on,
if equipped.
replacement when damaged.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they
do not make it impossible to steal.
The following table shows laminated glass location,
based on vehicle model and options.
Vehicle Configuration
ETG Locations
Sliding door forward
window
Eight Seat Passenger Vans
Sliding door forward
window and rear-most side
windows
Twelve and Fifteen Seat
Passenger Vans
Long Wheelbase
Cargo Vans
Rear-most side windows
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
The security light will come on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle's
starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and
fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone
using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
If the engine does not start and the security message
comes on, the key may have a damaged transponder.
Turn the ignition off and try again.
Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key® III+
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive
theft deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the instrument panel PASS
KEY fuse. If the engine still does not start with the other
key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does
start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to
have a new key made. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
on page 6‑107
.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. This
procedure is for learning additional keys only. If all the
currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate,
you must see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys made and
programmed to the system.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
ON/RUN within 10 seconds of removing the
previous key.
The security message will turn off once the key
has been programmed. It may not be apparent that
the security message went on due to how quickly
the key is programmed.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III+ key, see your
dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
To program the new key:
1. Verify the new key has 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed key into
the ignition lock cylinder and start the engine. If the
engine will not start, see your dealer/retailer for
service.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time the
new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard
stops with new linings can mean premature
wear and earlier replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every time you get new
brake linings.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑30 for the trailer
towing capabilities of the vehicle and more
information.
.
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
.
Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
Following break‐in, engine speed and load can be
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do
not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
gradually increased.
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A (LOCK/OFF) : This position locks the ignition and
transmission. You will only be able to remove the key
when the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This is the position in which
you can operate things like the radio and the windshield
wipers when the engine is off.
C (ON/RUN) : This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
and the regular brake pedal applied.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be
drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
.
Audio System
.
D (START) : This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
Power Windows (if equipped)
These features will work when the ignition key is in
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, power to the radio will
continue to work 10 minutes or until the driver door is
opened. The power windows will continue to work for up
to 10 minutes or until any door is opened.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START for many seconds, cranking
will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage,
this system also prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/
Starting the Engine
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
To place the transmission in the proper gear:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5‐10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to 15 seconds. Wait at least
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer/retailer. If you do
not, the engine might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go
of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do
not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
For the variable fast idle, press and hold the
accelerator at the desired RPM, then press and
release the cruise control cruise set switch to set
the desired idle speed.
Fast Idle System
Fast Idle System with Switch
If the vehicle has this feature it is available only with
cruise control. The manual fast idle switch is operated
using the cruise control buttons located on the left hand
side of the steering wheel.
When the fast idle is active the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display “FAST IDLE ON.”
One of the following actions will turn off the fast idle:
.
Pressing the brake.
This system can be used to increase engine idle speed
whenever the following conditions are met:
.
Selecting the Cancel button.
.
.
The park brake is set.
Releasing the Parking Brake.
.
.
The brake pedal is not pressed.
The transmission shifter is moved out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral).
.
The vehicle must not be moving and the
.
accelerator must not be pressed.
Selecting the cruise control on/off button when it
was previously on.
To control the fast idle:
.
To Enable the Fast idle, press and release the
Cruise Control On/Off button and ensure that the
LED is lit.
.
For the preset Fast Idle, press and release the
cruise set switch. This will set the preset fast idle
speed.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine, see the
DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information.
WARNING:
{
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm‐up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat
in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above
0°F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts and prevent damage.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord for the engine coolant heater is located
on the driver side of the engine compartment and
is attached to the hose for the power steering
reservoir.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the
area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
(Six Speed Automatic Transmission)
WARNING:
{
Vehicles with a six speed automatic transmission have
a shift position indicator within the instrument panel
cluster.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 3‑39. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑30.
See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section.
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily. When parked on a hill,
especially when the vehicle has a heavy load, you
might notice an increase in the effort to shift out of
P (Park). See Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
under Shifting Into Park on page 3‑39 for more
information.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 5‑18
.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
.
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
WARNING:
{
By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the next
gear and has more power.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
D (Drive) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load or driving on steep hills. You might want to
shift the transmission to a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding. See Skidding under
Loss of Control on page 5‑10.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts
the transmission shifting to the current driving
conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and
When temperatures are very cold, the transmission's
gear shifting could be delayed providing more stable
shifts until the engine warms up. Shifts could be more
noticeable with a cold transmission. This difference in
shifting is normal.
downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed to
determine, before making an upshift, if the engine is
able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such
as vehicle speed, throttle position, and vehicle load.
If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current
vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the transmission
does not upshift and instead holds the current gear. In
some cases, this could appear to be a delayed shift,
however the transmission is operating normally.
M (Manual Mode): This position lets drivers select the
range of gears appropriate for current driving
conditions. If the vehicle has this feature, see Range
Select Mode later in this section.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
It reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive) without
using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third) instead of
D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads, when
towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears
and when going down a steep hill. See Range Select
Mode later in this section.
The transmission uses adaptive shift controls. Adaptive
shift controls continually compares key shift parameters
to pre-programmed ideal shifts stored in the
transmissions computer. The transmission constantly
makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance
according to how the vehicle is being used, such as
with a heavy load or when temperature changes. During
this adaptive shift control process, shifting might feel
different as the transmission determines the best
settings.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can
use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle
speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use the brakes off and on. See
Range Select Mode later in this section.
The shift quality of a new vehicle may not be ideal
because the Adaptive Shift Control process may not
have determined the best settings for a particular shift
or condition. Shift quality will improve with continued
driving.
If you manually select 2 (Second) in an automatic
transmission, the transmission will start in second gear.
You can use this feature for reducing the speed of the
rear wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed without
using the brakes. You can use it for major/severe
downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise
accelerate due to steepness of grade. When you shift
to 1 (First) it provides the lowest gear appropriate to
current road speed and continues to downshift as the
vehicle slows, eventually downshifting to 1 (First) gear.
The transmission can be held in 1 (First) gear using
Range Select Mode or the shift lever. See Range Select
Mode later in this section.
Range Selection Mode
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
The vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode. The
Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle's
transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill
or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range
of gears.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use this feature, do the following:
While using Range Selection Mode, cruise control and
the Tow/Haul mode can be used.
1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode).
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the
steering column shift lever, to select the desired
range of gears for current driving conditions.
When M (Manual Mode) is selected a number displays
in the DIC next to the M indicating the current gear.
This number is the highest gear that can be used.
However, the vehicle can automatically shift to lower
gears as it adjusts to driving conditions. This means
that all gears below that number are available. When
5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
automatically shifted by the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot
be used until the plus/minus button located on the
steering column lever is used to change to the gear.
Low Traction Mode
Low Traction Mode can assist in vehicle acceleration
when road conditions are slippery. While the vehicle is
at a stop, select the second gear range using Range
Selection Mode. This will limit torque to the wheels after
it detects wheel slip, preventing the tires from spinning.
Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection
Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 3‑36.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
(Four Speed Automatic
Transmission)
WARNING:
{
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 3‑39. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑30.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must first
press the brake pedal before you can shift from P (Park)
with the ignition in ON/RUN.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
P (Park): This position locks your rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of
Park on page 3‑40.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
.
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
page 5‑18
.
.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under
Loss of Control on page 5‑10.
WARNING:
{
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
However it reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive)
without using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third)
instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads,
when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between
gears and when going down a steep hill.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
You should use 3 (Third) (or a lower gear as needed)
when towing a trailer to minimize heat build-up and
extend the life of the transmission.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can
use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle
speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use the brakes off and on.
Tow/Haul Mode
You may use this feature for reducing torque to the rear
wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle from a
stop on slippery road surfaces.
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission will not shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission have a tow/
haul mode. The tow/haul mode adjusts the transmission
shift pattern to reduce shift cycling, providing increased
performance, vehicle control, and transmission cooling
when towing or hauling heavy loads.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Grade Braking (Six Speed Automatic
Transmission)
The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by
pressing the tow/haul button on the dash. While in
Range Selection Mode , Grade Braking is deactivated
allowing the driver to select a desired range of gears.
Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/Haul Mode
is selected and you are not in the Range Selection
Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode listed previously and
Automatic Transmission Operation (Six Speed
Automatic Transmission) on page 3‑29 or Automatic
Transmission Operation (Four Speed Automatic
Transmission) on page 3‑34 for more information on
the Range Selection Mode. Grade Braking assists in
maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on
downhill grades by automatically shifting to lower gears
when the driver desires to slow the vehicle by applying
the brake. This reduces wear on the braking system
and increases control of the vehicle.
Turn the tow/haul mode on and off by pressing the
button, located to the right of the steering wheel on the
instrument panel. When tow/haul is on, a light on the
instrument panel cluster will come on.
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 4‑35 for more
information.
Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under Towing a Trailer on
page 5‑30 for more information.
Also see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑30 for more
information.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Grade Braking (Six Speed
Automatic Transmission)
Parking Brake
Cruise Grade Braking operates only while cruise control
is engaged in Tow/Haul mode. Cruise Grade Braking
assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when
driving on downhill grades in cruise control by
automatically shifting to lower gears when the cruise
set speed is exceeded.
While in the Range Selection Mode (RSM) mode,
cruise grade braking is not available.
See Automatic Transmission Operation (Six Speed
Automatic Transmission) on page 3‑29 or Automatic
Transmission Operation (Four Speed Automatic
Transmission) on page 3‑34.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal,
then push down the parking brake pedal.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the handle, located just above the
parking brake pedal, with the parking brake symbol, to
release the parking brake.
Shifting Into Park
WARNING:
{
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑30.
page 5‑30
.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑38.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand,
the vehicle is in P (Park).
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the
vehicle into P (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock. To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver seat.
To find out how, see Shifting Into Park on page 3‑39.
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake
is firmly set before you leave it. After you move the shift
lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from
P (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it
means that the shift lever was not fully locked into
P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the brakes
before you can shift from P (Park) when the ignition is in
ON/RUN. See Automatic Transmission Operation (Six
Speed Automatic Transmission) on page 3‑29 or
Automatic Transmission Operation (Four Speed
Automatic Transmission) on page 3‑34.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The shift lock control system is designed to do the
following:
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
.
Prevent the ignition key from being removed
2. While holding down the brake pedal, push the shift
lever all the way into P (Park)
unless the shift lever is in P (Park).
.
Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the regular
brake pedal is applied.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have the
vehicle serviced.
The shift lock control system is always functional
except in the case of a dead battery or low voltage
(less than 9 V) battery.
Parking Over Things That Burn
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 6‑40 for more information.
WARNING:
{
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
.
There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
.
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
.
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
.
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking
brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
WARNING:
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or
smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑42.
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 3‑39.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 5‑30.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Towing Mirrors
Mirrors
Vehicles with towing
Manual Rearview Mirror
mirrors can be adjusted
manually for a clear view
of the objects behind you.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror
to avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Push the tab
forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
If you have a cargo van without the rear door glass, the
vehicle may not have an inside rearview mirror.
Outside Manual Mirrors
Adjust the mirrors by pressing the mirror up and down
and left and right so you can see a little of the side of
your vehicle, and have a clear view of objects
behind you.
On the lower portion of each mirror there is an auxiliary
convex mirror that can be adjusted manually to provide
an extended field of view.
The mirrors can be manually folded in or out.
The mirrors can be manually folded in or out.
On the lower portion of each mirror is an auxiliary
convex mirror. A convex mirror's surface is curved so
you can see more from the driver seat. The auxiliary
convex mirrors can be adjusted manually by pressing
the mirror.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
WARNING:
Vehicles with outside
power mirrors have
controls located on the
driver side door.
{
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat.
Select each mirror by turning the knob clockwise for the
passenger side mirror or counterclockwise for the driver
side mirror. The center position is neutral.
Then, adjust the mirror angle by moving the knob in the
desired direction. The auxiliary convex mirrors can only
be adjusted manually.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
Storage Areas
Your vehicle may have a front storage compartment.
It is located at the center of the instrument panel
extension, by the floor. To open the compartment, pull
up on the latch. The compartment will open
automatically.
< (Rear Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors.
An indicator light in the button lights when the outside
heated mirrors are activated.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Climate Control
System on page 4‑15 for more information.
Storage compartments may also be included on the
inside of each front door.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System . . . . 4-18
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Headlamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Battery Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Accessory Power Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . 4-20
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Airbag Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light . . . 4-28
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Using an MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
DIC Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
DIC Vehicle Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt Wheel
Instrument Panel Overview
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on top of the steering column, to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble. Press again to turn
the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle's
turn signals will not work.
Horn
Press the horn symbol in the middle of the steering
wheel to sound the horn.
For vehicles with a tilt steering wheel, the lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever to move the steering wheel up or
down into a comfortable position.
2. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in
place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
G : An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes
in the direction of the turn or lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. The turn signal automatically
flashes three times and if the tow‐haul mode is active it
flashes six times. Holding the turn signal lever for more
than one second causes the turn signals to flash
continually until the lever is released.
The lever returns to its starting position when released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes
rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane Change Signals.
5 3 : Headlamp High/Low‐Beam Changer.
N : Windshield Wipers.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6‑107
.
Turn Signal On Chime
L : Windshield Washer.
Flash-to-Pass Feature.
If the turn signal is left on for more than 1.2 km (3/4 mi),
a chime sounds at each flash of the turn signal and the
message TURN SIGNAL ON also appears in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑44. To turn off the chime and
message, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
23 (Headlamp High/Low‐Beam Changer): Pull the
turn signal lever all the way toward you to change the
headlamps from low to high beam. Then release it.
The windshield wiper control is located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering wheel.
Turn the band with N on it to select the wiper speed.
8(Mist): Single wipe, hold the band on z , then
release. For several wipes, hold the band on z longer.
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Turn the band to adjust
the delay time between wipes. Turn the band up for
more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes.
d (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
a (High Speed): Fast wipes.
This instrument panel cluster light comes on when the
high beam headlamps are on.
9 (Off): Turns the windshield wipers off.
When driving during the day and the wipers are
activated, the head lamps automatically turn on after
completing eight wipe cycles.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature is used to signal to the vehicle ahead that
you want to pass.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged blades should be replaced.
If the headlamps are off or in the low‐beam position, pull
the turn signal lever toward you to momentarily switch
to high‐beams.
Release the lever to turn the high-beam headlamps off.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
The windshield wiper paddle is located on top of the
multifunction lever.
Cruise Control
WARNING:
{
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle to spray washer
fluid on the windshield. The wipers will clear the window
and then either stop or return to the preset speed.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use the cruise control on winding roads or
in heavy traffic.
WARNING:
{
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
With cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
When the brakes are applied, cruise control is
turned off.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, and the system begins
to limit wheel spin, cruise control will automatically
disengage. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑5.
When road conditions allow the cruise control to be
safely used again, it can be turned back on.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to the
desired speed.
WARNING:
{
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
T (On/Off): This button can both activate and turn off
the system. The indicator light on the button turns on
when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise
control is off.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
1. Press the I button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or make the
vehicle decelerate.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, this shuts off the cruise control.
But it does not need to be reset.
To reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control:
.
Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more, press the +RES button on the
steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the previously
set speed and stays there.
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
.
To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each
time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
.
Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed.
.
To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle's
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle's speed
down. When the brakes are applied the cruise control
turns off.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It controls the following systems:
Ending Cruise Control
.
Headlamps
There are three ways to end cruise control:
.
Taillamps
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
.
Parking Lamps
.
Press the [ button on the steering wheel.
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Press the I button on the steering wheel.
.
Instrument Panel Lights
Erasing Speed Memory
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
O (Off): Briefly turn the control to this position to turn
the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps
(DRL) off or back on.
Exterior Lamps
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position only
works for vehicles that are shifted into the P (Park)
position.
AUTO (Automatic): Turns on the headlamps
automatically at normal brightness, together with
the following:
.
Parking Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Taillamps
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering wheel.
.
License Plate Lamps
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
Headlamps on Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime sounds when the
headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on
and the key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime,
turn the headlamp switch to off or auto and then back
on, or close and re‐open the door. In the auto mode,
the headlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK/OFF
or may remain on until the headlamp delay ends,
if enabled in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “Exit Lighting” under DIC Vehicle Customization on
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together with
the following lamps listed below.
.
Parking Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
page 4‑53
.
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
If the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on,
the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned off. If the headlamps are turned on
while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will continue to
stay on. To prevent the battery from being drained, turn
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system comes on in daylight when the
following conditions are met:
the control to the 9 position.
.
A warning chime sounds if the driver door is opened
while the ignition switch is off and the headlamps
are on.
The ignition is on.
.
The exterior lamps control is in the AUTO position.
.
The shift lever is not in P (Park).
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel.
.
The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, the taillamps, sidemarker,
instrument panel and other lamps will not be on.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The automatic headlamp system automatically switches
from DRL to the headlamps depending on the darkness
of the surroundings.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that
driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights
does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system is only affected when the light sensor
sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior lamp control to the
off position and then release it. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, the transmission must be in the P (Park)
position, before the DRL can be turned off.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
30 seconds for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as
usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 4‑11.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp
switch is in AUTO, the automatic headlamp system
turns on the headlamps, along with the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker lamps, and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn
the exterior lamps switch to the off position and
then release. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
transmission must be in the P (Park) position, before
the automatic headlamp system can be turned off.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob for this feature is located next to the exterior
lamps control.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor or the system
will come on whenever the ignition is on.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Push the knob to extend
and then turn clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the instrument panel lights and the radio display.
This only works if the headlamps or parking lamps
are on.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doors
closed, turn the knob all the way clockwise.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamps
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The dome lamp override button is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning
the instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or
closed.
The dome lamp override sets the dome lamps to remain
off or come on automatically when a door is opened.
E (Dome Lamp Override): Press the button in and the
dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press
the button again to return it to the extended position so
that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
Entry/Exit Lighting
The vehicle has an illuminated entry/exit feature.
The dome lamps come on if the dome override button is
in the out position, when a door is opened or the key is
removed from the ignition.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads,
and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
Reading Lamps
For vehicles with reading lamps, press the button
located next to each lamp to turn it on or off.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to
the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or
LOW BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical
loads as much as possible. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑44.
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left
on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in
LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent the battery from
running down.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets
located on the instrument panel.
To use the accessory power outlet lift the cover.
The spring cap cover closes by itself when the outlet
is empty.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the
accessory power plugs.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
For vehicles with an ashtray it is located in the center
console or on the instrument panel. Pull up on the
ashtray door to open it if it is in the console or pull
the door open it if it is on the instrument panel.
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are
put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the console or
from the slide out door. To reinstall the ashtray, slide it
back to the original position.
Vehicles Without Air Conditioning
To use the cigarette lighter, if the vehicle has one, push
it in all the way, and let go. When it is ready for use, it
will pop back out by itself.
A. Fan Control
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
Do not use the lighter to plug in accessory devices.
Use the power outlets provided.
9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
9 (Off): Turns the system off.
Temperature Control: Turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets, with some air directed toward
the windshield.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some
air directed to the windshield and side windows.
Vehicles With Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Outside air is directed to the floor and
defroster outlets. Adjust the temperature knob for
warmer or cooler air. The air conditioning compressor
might turn on in this setting to dehumidify the air.
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
D. Rear Window Defogger
1 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog or
frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield, with
some to the floor outlets and front side windows. The air
conditioning compressor might turn on in this setting to
dehumidify the air.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
needed for the vehicle to cool down and the system
operates more efficiently.
# (Air Conditioning): Cools and dehumidifies the air
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
inside of the vehicle.
V (Maximum Air Conditioning): Cools the air inside
the vehicle faster, by recirculating the inside air.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
For vehicles with a rear window defogger, a warming
grid is used to remove fog or frost from the rear window.
Use the outlets located near the center and on the
sides of the instrument panel to change the direction
of airflow.
It only works when the ignition is in ON/RUN.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off.
Operation Tips
.
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
The rear window defogger turns off several minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger will run for several more minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by
turning off the engine.
inlets at the base of the windshield that may block
the flow of air into your vehicle.
.
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
vehicle more effectively.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (High): This position supplies the most amount of
Rear Heating System
heat to the rear-seating area.
For vehicles with a rear heating system, it lets you
adjust the amount of air flowing into the rear of the
vehicle, from the front-seating area. This feature works
with the main climate-control system in the vehicle.
c (Medium): This position supplies half the amount of
heat to the rear‐seating area.
R (Low): This position supplies the least amount of
heat to the rear-seating area.
9 (Off): Turns the rear heating system off.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System
For vehicles with a rear heating and air-conditioning
system, it maintains the temperature, fan speed and air
delivery for the rear-seat passengers only. It also works
with the main climate-control system in the vehicle.
AUX: The thumbwheel for this system is located in the
switchbank below the audio system.
9 (Fan): Turn the thumbwheel up or down to increase
or decrease the amount of heated air sent to the
rear-seating area.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a 343 cm (135 inch) wheelbase, a
rear control panel for this system is located in the
second row behind the driver in the rear of the vehicle.
The temperature, air delivery mode, and the fan speed
can be adjusted for the rear seating area by a rear seat
passenger.
AUX (Auxiliary): Turn the fan knob on the front climate
control panel to AUX to let rear seat passengers use
the control panel in the rear seating area. This disables
the front control panel. To return control to the front
panel, move the fan knob out of AUX.
Front Climate Control Panel
Use this control panel to maintain a separate
temperature setting. Adjust the direction of the airflow
or adjust the fan speed for the rear seat passenger(s).
9 : Turns the system off.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed in the
rear-seating area.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature in the rear‐seating area.
The air-conditioning system on the main climate control
panel must be turned on to direct cooled air to the rear
of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the temperature in the
rear of the vehicle remains at cabin temperature.
Rear Climate Control Panel
A. Fan Control
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Temperature Control
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
in the rear seating area.
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the upper outlets, with some
directed to the floor outlets.
2 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear
of any objects so that the air inside of the vehicle can
circulate effectively.
For information on how to use the main climate control
Gauges can indicate when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Often
gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
system, see Climate Control System on page 4‑15
.
For information on ventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on
page 4‑17
.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States 4‐Speed Version shown, 6‐Speed and Canada similar
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,
unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
The safety belt light
This vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999 if it is turned back.
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it must
be set to the mileage total of the old odometer. If that is
not possible, then it must be set at zero and a label
must be put on the driver door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has
been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Press the Trip/Fuel button on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) switch to display the trip odometer and the
regular odometer information.
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑37 for
more information on resetting the trip odometer.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the Trip/Fuel button on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) switch.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
WARNING:
{
The system checks the airbag's electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 2‑59.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
For vehicles with a remote start, the airbag readiness
light will stay on until the driver places the ignition
switch to the ON/RUN position.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑44 for more information.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Off Light
WARNING:
{
When the right front passenger airbag is manually
turned off using the airbag on-off switch on the
instrument panel, if equipped, the indicator light OFF or
the off symbol will come on and stay on as a reminder
that the airbag has been turned off. This light will go off
when the airbag has been turned on. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 2‑69 for more information, including
important safety information.
If the right front passenger's airbag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and help
protect the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the passenger's airbag unless the
person sitting there is in a risk group identified by
the national government. See Airbag Off Switch
on page 2‑69 for more on this, including
important safety information.
United States
Canada
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
WARNING:
{
If the vehicle has a passenger sensing system,
the instrument panel will have a passenger airbag
status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑73 for important safety information. The
instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For example, the right
front passenger airbag could inflate even though
the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have
the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑23 for more
information, including important safety information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit, it means that the
right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may
inflate). See Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑69 for more
information, including important safety information.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running,
as a check to show it is
working.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for
more information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light
on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
WARNING:
{
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑23
for more information, including important safety
information.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle can be only driven for a short time with the
reading in either warning zone. If it must be driven, turn
off all unnecessary accessories.
Voltmeter Gauge
When the engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on, this gauge shows the
battery's state of charge
in DC volts.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still
work and stop the vehicle. For good braking, both need
to work.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have the brake system inspected right away.
When the engine is running, the gauge shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light also comes on when the parking brake is set.
See Parking Brake on page 3‑38 for more information.
The light stays on if the parking brake does not fully
release. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully
released, it means the vehicle has a brake problem.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push, or the
pedal might go closer to the floor. It could take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑26.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
WARNING:
{
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the
vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑27.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for all
brake related DIC messages.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
For vehicles with the
StabiliTrak® system,
this light comes on or
flashes, according to the
description table for the
StabiliTrak system.
United States
Canada
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System on
page 5‑5
.
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gauge
will read 100°C (210°F) or less. If the vehicle is pulling a
load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 122°C (250°F) mark. If the
gauge reaches the 125°C (260°F) mark, it indicates that
the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
Three chimes sound if the light turns on and one chime
if the light turns off.
If this light remains on steady, the vehicle needs to be
taken in for service.
See Engine Overheating on page 6‑32.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides
information about tire
pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑68 for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑37 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑64
for more information.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. If it
does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can
prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This
system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 6‑4.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run
as efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6‑10. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full
tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6‑7.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
.
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Gauge
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or might begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on with the engine running,
or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
United States
Canada
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if the battery has
recently been replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
The oil pressure gauge shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
Oil Pressure Light
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problem causing low
oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.
WARNING:
{
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
WARNING:
{
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 4‑6 for more information.
Highbeam On Light
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other
system problem.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle's
security system, see
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation on
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4‑5
for more information.
page 3‑20
.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
For vehicles with the tow/
haul mode feature, this
light comes on when the
Tow/Haul mode has been
activated.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on
page 3‑36
.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The gauge first indicates empty before the vehicle is out
of fuel, and the fuel tank should be refueled soon.
Fuel Gauge
Listed are four situations customers might experience
with the fuel gauge. None of these indicate a problem
with the fuel gauge:
.
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gauge reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank's
capacity to fill the tank.
.
The gauge moves a little while turning a corner or
speeding up.
United States
Canada
.
The gauge does not go back to empty when the
ignition is turned off.
The fuel gauge, when the ignition is on, indicates how
much fuel is left in the vehicle's fuel tank.
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine, see the
DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information.
An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, next to the instrument panel cluster.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display located at
the bottom of the instrument panel cluster. The DIC
buttons are located on the instrument panel, next to the
instrument panel cluster.
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the trip/
fuel, vehicle information,
customization, and set/
reset buttons. The button
functions are detailed in
the following pages.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
If your vehicle has these features, the DIC also
displays the compass direction and the outside air
temperature when viewing the trip and fuel information.
The compass direction appears on the top right corner
of the DIC display. The outside air temperature
automatically appears in the bottom right corner of the
DIC display. If there is a problem with the system that
controls the temperature display, the numbers will be
replaced with dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, average economy,
fuel used, timer, average speed, and digital tachometer.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4‑53 for more
information.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip Odometers
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for vehicles
with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS),
engine hours, Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
programming for vehicles with the TPMS and without
a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, compass
zone and compass calibration on vehicles with this
feature, and RKE transmitter programming.
Press the trip/fuel button until A or B displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since the last reset for
each trip odometer. Both trip odometers can be used
at the same time.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing the set/reset button while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
U (Customization): Press this button to customize
the feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4‑53 for more information.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on
the DIC.
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold
the set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of kilometers (km) or
miles (mi) driven since the ignition was last turned on
and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins
moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage.
For example, if the vehicle was driven 8 km (5 miles)
before it is started again, and then the retro-active reset
feature is activated, the display will show 8 km (5 miles).
As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then
increase to 8.1 km (5.1 miles), 8.2 km (5.2 miles), etc.
Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until XX km (mi) displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has been
driven in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi).
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the
vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the
display will show the number of kilometers (km) or
miles (mi) that were driven during the last ignition cycle.
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY
displays. This display shows the approximate average
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per
gallon (mpg). This number is calculated based on the
number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the last time
this menu item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY,
press and hold the set/reset button. The display will
return to zero.
Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining kilometers (km) or miles (mi) the vehicle can
be driven without refueling. The display will show LOW
if the fuel level is low.
Fuel Used
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may change
even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank.
This is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
This display shows the number of liters (L) or
gallons (gal) of fuel used since the last reset of this
menu item. To reset the fuel used information, press
and hold the set/reset button while FUEL USED is
displayed.
Timer
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.
This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount
of time that has passed since the timer was last
reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will
continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on,
even if another display is being shown on the DIC.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for
more information.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will return
to zero.
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while
TIMER is displayed.
Oil Life
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button while TIMER is displayed.
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil's remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL
LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of
the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
Average Speed
Press the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This display shows the average speed of the
vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of
this value. To reset the value, press and hold the set/
reset button. The display will return to zero.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44. You should
change the oil as soon as possible. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑16. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3
for more information.
Digital Tachometer
Press the trip/fuel button until Tachometer ##00 RPM
displays. This display shows the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM).
Blank Display
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself
after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed.
This display shows no information.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life
System on page 6‑18.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Units
Engine Hours
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units.
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE
HOURS displays. This display shows the total number
of hours the engine has run.
Relearn Tire Positions
Your vehicle may have this display. To access this
display, the vehicle must be in P (Park). If your vehicle
has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor, the
system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the
tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 6‑67. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑71 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑44 for more information.
Tire Pressure
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed
in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either
kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per square inch (psi). Press
the vehicle information button until the DIC displays
FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
Change Compass Zone
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to check
the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑64 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44 for more
information.
Your vehicle may have this feature. To change the
compass zone through the DIC, see DIC Compass on
page 4‑42
.
Calibrate Compass
Your vehicle may have this feature. The compass
can be manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass
through the DIC, see DIC Compass on page 4‑42.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relearn Remote Key
DIC Compass
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. This procedure will
erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,
they must be relearned as additional transmitters.
To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
1. Press the vehicle information button until
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state
or province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
Compass variance is the difference between the
earth's magnetic north and true geographic north.
If the compass is not set to the zone where you live,
the compass may give false readings. The compass
must be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle
is traveling.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Blank Display
Press the vehicle information button until
This display shows no information.
PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
displays.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for
example, N for North, or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount,
a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder,
or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move
the magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate
the compass.
2. Find the vehicle's current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
DIC Warnings and Messages
Compass Calibration Procedure
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in which
the vehicle is located. See “Compass Variance
(Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during the
calibration procedure.
2. Press the vehicle information button until
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be cleared.
You should take any messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
messages will only make the messages disappear,
not correct the problem.
PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the calibration is complete.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
The DIC display will then return to PRESS V TO
CALIBRATE COMPASS.
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned off. See Exterior Lamps on page 4‑9 for
more information.
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to
reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18 for
information on how to reset the message. See Engine
Oil on page 6‑16 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 7‑3 for more information.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned on. See Exterior Lamps on page 4‑9 for
more information.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE LOW
ADD AIR TO TIRE
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN CIRCLES
This message displays when calibrating the compass.
Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 8 km/h (5 mph)
to complete the calibration. See DIC Compass on
page 4‑42 for more information.
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle's tires is low. The low tire
pressure warning light will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 4‑30. This message will also
indicate which tire needs to be checked. You can
receive more than one tire pressure message at a time.
To read the other messages that may have been sent
at the same time, press the set/reset button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
See Tires on page 6‑56, Loading the Vehicle on
CALIBRATION COMPLETE
This message displays when the compass calibration is
complete. See DIC Compass on page 4‑42 for more
information.
CARGO DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the cargo
door is open while the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off
the vehicle and check the cargo door. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
page 5‑19, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑64
.
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑37
.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
driver door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a
drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
If your vehicle has an oil level sensor, this message
displays if the oil level in the vehicle is low. Check the
oil level and correct it as necessary. You may need to
let the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to
be sure this message clears. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑16 for additional information.
ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑32 for
more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on
page 4‑29. To avoid added strain on a hot engine,
the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the
air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 4‑29.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible to
avoid damage to the engine.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while
this message is on, but acceleration and speed may be
reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer/retailer for service as
soon as possible.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑32 for
more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays if the fuel level is low. Refuel as
soon as possible. See Fuel Gauge on page 4‑36 and
Fuel on page 6‑6 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating
temperature.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the outside air
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine
further enters the engine coolant protection mode.
See Engine Overheating on page 6‑32 for further
information.
On some vehicles, this message displays and a chime
sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed
and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the
door again. Check to see if the message still appears
on the DIC.
This message also displays when the vehicle's engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil
pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur.
If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause
of the low oil pressure is corrected. See Engine Oil
on page 6‑16 for more information.
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your
vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3‑4 and DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4‑37 for more information.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not
operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has
been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible and
have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
See Engine Oil on page 6‑16.
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑4.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
On some vehicles, this message displays and a chime
sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully
closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and
close the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a
drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see
if the message still appears on the DIC.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in
heating and air conditioning efficiency.
This message displays along with the brake system
warning light if there is a problem with the brake
system. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 4‑27. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed or appears again when you
begin driving, the brake system needs service as soon
as possible. See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect the
system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 4‑23 and Airbag System on page 2‑59 for more
information.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message
displays, it means there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak system. If you see this message, try to
reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should
see your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle is safe
to drive, however, you do not have the benefit of
StabiliTrak, so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn on
in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
Light on page 4‑26. Driving with this problem could
drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Have the electrical system checked as soon as
possible. See your dealer/retailer.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem
with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or
may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer before turning off the engine.
See PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation
on page 3‑20 for more information.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the transmission. See your dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
STABILITRAK NOT READY
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the system
is not working properly. The tire pressure light also
flashes and then remains on during the same ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4‑30. Several
conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑68 for more
information. If the warning comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message may
display and the StabiliTrak indicator light on the
instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the
vehicle and exceeding 32 km/h (20 mph) for 30 seconds.
The StabiliTrak system is not functional until the light
has turned off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑5
for more information.
STABILITRAK OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when you turn off StabiliTrak, or when the stability
control has been automatically disabled. To limit
wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you should
normally leave StabiliTrak on.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when there is a problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). When this message displays, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for service.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑5 for more
information.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, you should turn StabiliTrak off if your vehicle
gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want
to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are
driving in extreme off-road conditions and require more
wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow on page 5‑18. To turn the StabiliTrak
system on or off, see StabiliTrak® System on
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
immediately.
page 5‑5
.
This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
.
One condition is overheating, which could occur if
This message cannot be acknowledged.
StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
.
The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑27.
This message may display and a chime may be
heard along with the check engine light on the
instrument panel cluster if the vehicle's fuel cap is
not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 4‑30. Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling
the Tank on page 6‑10. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should turn this light and
message off.
.
The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
.
The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays along with a chime if the
transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with
the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This message clears and
the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a
safe level.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), this message displays when the
system is re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle.
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑37 for
more information. The tire positions must be re-learned
after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑71
,
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑67, and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑64 for more
information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
WAIT TO START
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned off.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 5‑5 for more information.
This message displays briefly when the theft-deterrent
system has initially found incorrect conditions within the
vehicle and is making a double check. If your vehicle
does not start soon after, try to start it again. If it still
does not start, have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with overheated
transmission fluid or while the transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
DIC Vehicle Customization
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to one
preferred setting. Customization features can only be
programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot
be programmed to a preferred setting for two different
drivers.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
All of the customization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LANGUAGE
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle's
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 3‑10 for more
information.
Press the customization button until the LANGUAGE
screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park).
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC. A beep will
sound once a language has been selected.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows
you to select which doors and when the doors will
automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Locks on page 3‑10 for more information.
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4 for more
information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver's door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver's door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park) .
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when the
key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock
button is pressed again within five seconds of the
previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle's doors will be delayed. When
locking the doors with the power door lock switch and a
door is open, this feature will delay locking the doors
until five seconds after the last door is closed. You will
hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition
for this feature to work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice.
See Delayed Locking on page 3‑10 for more
information.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4
for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle's
doors.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
after the last door is closed.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods
after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
10 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 10 seconds.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter. The lights will remain on
for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is no longer off.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHIME VOLUME
FACTORY SETTINGS
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the
chime.
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
level.
will be set to their factory default settings.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
Audio System(s)
If the vehicle came without a radio, the wiring provisions
for a radio and an antenna were installed at the
assembly plant, so that if you want, a radio can be
installed at the dealer/retailer.
This feature allows you to exit the feature
settings menu.
Press the customization button until FEATURE
SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to exit
the menu.
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
WARNING:
{
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
.
The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
.
The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
pressed.
.
The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
.
A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications on
.
Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
.
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 6‑4
.
page 5‑2
.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3‑24 for more information.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle's engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3 Radio with a Single CD Player
Setting the Clock
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD (MP3)
AM/FM Radio with Optional CD Player
If your vehicle has an AM/FM radio with an optional
player, the radio has a H button for setting the time
and date.
CD player, it has a H button for setting the time.
With these types of radios, the clock can be set
with either the radio turned on or off.
To set the time and date, follow the instructions:
1. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
Set the time by following these steps:
1. Press H until the hour begins flashing on display.
Press this button a second time and the minutes
begin flashing on display.
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of
the labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
Press H a third time and the 12HR or 24HR time
format begins flashing.
.
Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or the \ FWD
2. While either the hour or the minutes are flashing,
(forward) button.
turn the f knob, located on the upper right side
of the radio, clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the time. While the 12HR
3. To decrease, press the left © SEEK arrow or
the s REV button. You can also turn the f knob,
located on the upper right side of the radio, to
adjust the selected setting.
or 24HR time format is flashing, turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to select the default
time settings.
3. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the
flashing stops after five seconds and the current
time displayed is automatically set.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the
You can change the time default setting from 12 hours
to 24 hours or change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year.
radio has a MENU button instead of the H button to set
the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
To change the time or date default settings, follow these
instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option
displays, press the pushbutton located under that
label. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
month, day, and year) displays.
1. Press H and then the pushbutton located under
the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the
radio screen until the time 12H (hour) and 24H
(hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and
DD/MM (day and month) are displayed.
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels to change. Every time the pushbutton is
pressed again, the time or the date if selected,
increases by one.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
.
Another way to increase the time or date,
3. Press the H button again to apply the selected
is to press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or
the \ FWD (forward) button.
default, or let the screen time out.
3. To decrease, press the left © SEEK arrow or
the s REV button, or turn the f knob, located
on the upper right side of the radio, to adjust the
selected setting.
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
Radio(s)
To change the time default setting from 12 hours
to 24 hours or change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year.
To change the time or date default settings, follow these
instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option
displays, press the pushbutton located under the
forward arrow that is currently displayed on the
radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),
and the date MM/DD (month and day) and
DD/MM (day and month) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
AM-FM Radio shown, Radio with CD (Base) similar
3. Press the MENU button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
When the radio is turned on, it plays at the volume level
that was last set. The volume can be adjusted using
this knob.
4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD
(Base)): Press to switch the display between the radio
station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off,
press to display the time.
Radio with CD (MP3) shown,
Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
4 (Information) (MP3 and RDS Features): Press to
display additional text information related to the current
FM-RDS station or MP3 song. A choice of additional
information such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT
(category) can display. Continue pressing to highlight
the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned
under any one of the labels and the information about
that label displays.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The Radio may have a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information. This system
relies upon receiving specific information from these
stations and only works when the information is
available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
station, the station name or call letters displays.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H (Clock) (AM-FM Radio and Radio with
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between FM1 and FM2 and
CD (Base)): The radio has a clock button for
setting the time. With this type of radio, the clock
can be set with either the radio turned on or off. See
Setting the Clock on page 4‑61 for more information.
AM. The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the station frequency.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as you speed up or slow down while driving.
That way, the volume level should sound about the
same as you drive.
© SEEK ¨ : Press the arrows to go to the previous
or to the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. For AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD (Base),
the station frequency flashes while the radio is in the
scan mode. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
label on the radio display.
For AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD (Base), scan
presets within the current selected band by pressing
and holding either SEEK arrow for four seconds until a
double beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds if a strong signal is present,
then goes to the next stored preset. The station
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle has a FAV button,
a maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below
the radio station frequency labels and by using the
radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press the
FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any combination of
AM and FM stations.
Setting Preset Stations
If the radio does not have a FAV button, up to
18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously
adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.
When that pushbutton is pressed and released, the
station that was set, returns.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
the station is to be stored.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature.
See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. You can also adjust the highlighted setting by
pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV
button until the desired levels are obtained. If a station's
frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the
treble.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) (AM-FM
Radio and Radio with CD (Base))
BASS/TREB Bass/Treble: To adjust the bass or treble,
press the f knob or the EQ button until the desired
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
tone control label displays. Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the setting.
The display shows the current bass or treble level.
If a station's frequency is weak, or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass
and treble equalization settings designed for different
types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk,
jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing
bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and
treble settings.
Unique BASS/TREB settings can be saved for each
source.
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
(AM-FM Radio and Radio with
CD (Base))
` (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance or fade,
press the ` button or the f knob until the desired
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™ mode.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
United States and Canada only.
For this vehicle, the XM™ function is not available.
speaker control label displays. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the setting.
Radio Messages
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Locked or Loc : One of these messages will display
when the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the
radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
label. Turn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the highlighted setting.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to
the middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the ^ button.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD or DVD player scans the bottom surface of the disc.
If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the CD does not play properly or
not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
press the Z button or the DISP knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is needed, try labeling
the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD
optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player
mechanism.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
© SEEK ¨ : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the CD.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
4-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a
six-disc CD player.
To use random on a Radio with a Six-Disc CD player,
do the following:
1. Press the CD/AUX button, press and hold ^ .
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert
one or more discs partway into the slot of the
CD player.
To use random on the Base Radio with Single
CD player, do the following:
.
Press the RDM button to play tracks from a CD in
random order. The random icon displays. Press
again to turn off random play. The random icon
disappears from the display.
2. To play tracks from all CDs loaded in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under the
RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays.
Press the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
To use random on an Uplevel Radio with a Single
CD player, do the following:
RPT (Repeat (Base Radio with CD): With the repeat
setting, one track can be repeated. To repeat the track
you are listening to, press and release the RPT button.
An arrow symbol displays. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
1. Press the CD/AUX button, insert a disc partway
into the slot of the CD player. A RDM label
displays.
2. To play the tracks in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 (Information) (Base Radio with CD): Press to switch
the display between the track number, elapsed time of
the track, and the time. When the ignition is off, press to
display the time.
CD Messages
REMOVE/CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single
CD player or radios with a Six-Disc player displays
CHECK DISC and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
ERR (Error): If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
.
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track number displays when
a CD is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Input Device Found”
may display.
normal, the CD should play.
.
You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
.
There could have been a problem while burning
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
the CD-R or CD-RW.
.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
The radio with a Single CD player or a Six-Disc CD
player has the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the
index.
4-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO: This message displays if the EJECT or CD/AUX
buttons are pressed and a CD has not been inserted
into the player.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 5‑2 for more information on driver distraction.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the
vehicle speakers.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer while reporting the problem.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to
do additional volume adjustments from the portable
device if the volume is not loud or soft enough.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such as
an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, etc.
can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as
another source for audio listening.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or turn
it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
a portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, the message No Aux Input Device displays.
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files.
Using an MP3
Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder or
album should contain 18 songs or less.
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
.
Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.
.
.
Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists could cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large
number of files, folders, playlists or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on
the display, potentially getting cut off.
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.
By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left
side of the screen but plays both file formats in the
order in which they were recorded to the disc.
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
.
Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
.
Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc could cause the disc
not to function in the player.
.
Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
4-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Empty Directory or Folder
Playlists can be changed by using the S c (previous)
and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does
not display.
the © SEEK ¨ arrows. You can also play an MP3
CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded using no file folders.
If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum
of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files,
the player lets you access and navigate up to the
maximum, but all items over the maximum are not
accessible.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated
as a folder. If the root directory has compressed
audio files, the directory displays as the CD label.
All files contained directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory folders. However,
playlists (Px) are always accessed before root folders
or files.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and up buttons search
playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA)
and MP3 files, a folder under the root directory called
CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc.
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using
the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders
containing compressed audio song files.
.
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for the
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side
up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
.
Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless you
have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text
and the extension of the filename does not display.
4-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is
currently playing, press and release this button. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW
can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
automatically pulls back into the player and begins
playing.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files
on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all
discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW
you are listening to in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
© SEEK ¨ : Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next
MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed
multiple times, the player continues moving backward
or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize
All Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton
again to turn off random play.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next
folder.
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below
the back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name is displayed on the
second line between the arrows and songs from the
current album begins to play. Once all songs from that
album are played, the player moves to the next album
in alphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW and begins
playing MP3 files from that album.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in
order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player scans
the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It could take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3 files recorded to
the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio can begin playing while
it is scanning the disc in the background. When the
scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing
again.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist
playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW and begins
playing MP3 files by that artist. If you want to listen
to MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbutton
located below either arrow button. You will go to the
next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either button until the desired artist is
displayed.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number displays
when a CD is in the player. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Input Device Found”
displays.
4-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Non-RDS Radios
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle's radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOC displays.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
your vehicle's options.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel. They
include the following:
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
RDS Radios
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle's radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOCKED displays.
w x (Previous/Next): Press the arrows to go to the
previous or to the next radio station and stay there.
Press the arrows to go to the previous or to the next
radio station stored as a Favorite. The radio only
seeks stations with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
To scan stations, press and hold the down arrow for
two seconds until SCAN displays and a beep sounds.
The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press the down arrow
again to stop scanning.
When a CD is playing, press either arrow to go to the
next or previous track.
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
g (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, to turn the sound on.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio, CD, and auxiliary input jack.
FM Stereo
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume
button to increase or to decrease the volume.
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or
hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out.
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio
station while in AM or FM. Press the seek arrow to go to
the next track while sourced to the CD.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with
the vehicle's radio. This interference may occur
when making or receiving phone calls, charging the
phone's battery, or simply having the phone on. This
interference causes an increased level of static while
listening to the radio. If static is received while listening
to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
Fixed Mast Antenna
AM
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged as long as it is securely
attached to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent,
straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent,
replace it.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better
radio reception, most AM radio stations boost the
power levels during the day, and then reduce these
levels during the night.
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand.
4-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and the
Vehicle
WARNING:
{
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2‑10.
WARNING:
{
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
.
Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑27.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road
can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking,
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
The brakes might not have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent
a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on.
This is normal.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
If there is a problem with
the ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 4‑28
.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at both rear wheels.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement
system called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer
controlled system that assists the driver with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help the
driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the
vehicle's brakes to assist the driver with keeping the
vehicle on the intended path.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to insure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
In some cases, it may take approximately 2 miles
(3.2 km) of driving before the system initializes.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The brakes might
vibrate or some noise might be heard, but this is
normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more
than even the very best braking.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For your safety, the system can only be disabled when
the vehicle speed is less than 20 mph (32 km/h). Three
chimes will be heard and the StabiliTrak light comes on.
Press and hold the
StabiliTrak button located
on the instrument panel
for more than
five seconds to turn off
StabiliTrak and part of the
traction control system.
To turn on the StabiliTrak system, press the StabiliTrak
button again. StabiliTrak will automatically turn back on
when the vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h). One
chime is heard and the StabiliTrak light will turn off.
When the StabiliTrak system has been turned off,
system noises may still be heard as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow on page 5‑18.
The StabiliTrak light
comes on the instrument
panel cluster when the
system is turned off or
requires service.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
on page 4‑29
.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak System Operation
Traction Control Operation
The StabiliTrak system is normally on, except when
the system is initializing or has been disabled with the
StabiliTrak button. The StabiliTrak system will
automatically activate to assist the driver in maintaining
vehicle directional control in most driving conditions.
When activated, the StabiliTrak system may reduce
engine power to the wheels and apply braking to
individual wheels as necessary to assist the driver with
vehicle directional control. If cruise control is being
used when StabiliTrak activates, the cruise control
automatically disengages. The cruise control can be
re-engaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise
Control on page 4‑6.
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels and by applying brakes to
each individual wheel as necessary .
If the brake-traction control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed
braking, the brake-traction control will be automatically
disabled. The system will come back on after the
brakes have cooled. This can take up to two minutes
or longer depending on brake usage.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this a reduction in
acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration
may be heard. This is normal.
The StabiliTrak system may also turn off automatically if
it determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4 for more information.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locking Rear Axle
Steering
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction
on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low,
this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If the vehicle has this feature, engine power is sent to
all four wheels when extra traction is needed. This is
like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate lever or
switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It is fully
automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for road
conditions.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because
there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 5‑3. It is better to remove as much speed as
possible from a collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be
turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
.
Look down the road, to the sides, and to
crossroads for situations that might affect a
successful pass. If in doubt, wait.
.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double‐solid line on your
side of the lane.
.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
.
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
.
When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches),
about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance is longer and vehicle control more
limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You might not realize the surface is
slippery until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize
warning clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle could straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the
braking skid.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
.
.
Watch for animals.
Driving at Night
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Night driving tips include:
.
.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
Drive defensively.
.
Do not drink and drive.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
.
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light
up so much road ahead.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep‐standing or
flowing water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
WARNING:
{
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal
until the brakes work normally.
.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
on page 6‑56
.
.
Turn off cruise control.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
.
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
.
.
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
.
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
.
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
.
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
.
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
.
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in
these conditions include:
WARNING:
{
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down and they could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in gear when
going downhill.
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
.
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
WARNING:
{
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that
let you stay in your own lane.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
.
.
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a
slippery roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when
on dry pavement.
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
WARNING: (Continued)
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑8
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
.
.
Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on
.
Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
page 4‑3
.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
WARNING:
{
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑42.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
.
Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe and/or the fuel operated
heater exhaust system, if equipped. If the
vehicle has a diesel engine and a fuel
operated heater, see “Fuel Operated Heater
(FOH)” in the diesel engine supplement.
(Continued)
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
WARNING:
{
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5‑19.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6‑80.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes
a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does
not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to
be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑26.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.
WARNING:
{
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 6‑56 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑64
.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front
and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label” later
in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker).
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle. See
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑30 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Description
Example 2
Description
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle's
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity
weight.
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
A
(453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
B
C
1000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Available Cargo
Weight =
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear axles,
you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be
sure to spread out your load equally on both sides
of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
If there is a heavy load, it should be spread out.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver door. The label
shows the size of your vehicle's original tires and
the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING:
{
{
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
.
Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
.
Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
.
Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you carry inside
your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before
you buy and install the new equipment.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/
retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 8‑8.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing
.
What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
.
What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long
they can tow.
.
Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5‑14.
Two-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
Dolly Towing
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four
wheels off the ground.
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
Two‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with any of its wheels on the ground.
Use the following procedure to tow the vehicle from
the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑38 for more information.
All‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer's instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for
six weeks or more, remove the battery cable from
the negative terminal (post) of the battery to
prevent the battery from draining while towing.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with two
wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four
wheels off the ground.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with any of its wheels on the ground.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual for more information.
WARNING:
{
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later
in this section.
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
pulling a trailer.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
.
The weight of the trailer
.
The weight of the trailer tongue
.
There are many different laws, including speed
.
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make
sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial
police.
The weight on the vehicle's tires
Also see Tow/Haul later in this section for information
about the Tow/Haul button and the Tow/Haul indicator
light.
.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more information.
.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
.
Vehicles with an automatic transmissions can tow
in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear
if the transmission shifts too often under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
G1500 Cargo Van 2WD
4.3LV6
3.42
4,400 lbs (1 996 kg)
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
3.42
3.73
5.3LV8
H1500 Cargo Van AWD
5.3LV8
3.42
3.73
3.73
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
G1500 Passenger Van 2WD
5.3LV8
H1500 Passenger Van AWD
5.3LV8
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
3.73
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
4.8LV8
4.10
3.73
8,400 lbs (3 810 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
6.0LV8
4.10
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
3.73
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
4.8LV8
4.10
3.73
8,200 lbs (3 719 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
6.0LV8
4.10
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
6.0LV8
6.0LV8
3.73
4.10
7,600 lbs (3 447 kg)
9,600 lbs (4 355 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
3.73
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
7,400 lbs (3 295 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
4.8LV8
4.10
3.73
8,400 lbs (3 810 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
6.0LV8
4.10
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
3.73
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
7,100 lbs (3 221 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
4.8LV8
4.10
3.73
8,200 lbs (3 719 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
6.0LV8
4.10
G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
6.0LV8
G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
6.0LV8 3.73
3.73
7,600 lbs (3 447 kg)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
*The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer
including any passengers, cargo equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6 for more information.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of
the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it,
and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there
are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must
be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑19 for more information about the vehicle's
maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be
10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B), up to a maximum of 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with a
weight distributing hitch.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that
will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will
help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the
rear axle.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle's ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The
effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering
capacity more than the total of the additional weight.
Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer
weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much as
1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could be
850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the
rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit for
RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg)
could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs
(181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now
weighs:
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of
total loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer
the vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of
its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum
Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be
sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
the vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver's door or
see Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19. Make sure not
to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR,
including the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a
weight distributing hitch, make sure not to go over the
rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution
spring bars.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you might
think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be
subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect on
the rear axle must still be considered. Because the rear
axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg)
can be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight that can be handled.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the loaded trailer being pulled will weigh more than
5,000 lbs (2 270 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted
weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper
size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling when driving. Always use a
sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these
limits. Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Weight‐Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Will any holes need to be made in the body of the
vehicle when a trailer hitch is installed?
If using the wiring provided with the factory-installed
trailering package, no holes need to be made in the
body of the vehicle. However, if an aftermarket hitch is
installed, holes may need to be made in the body.
If holes are made in the body, then be sure to seal the
holes later when the hitch is removed. If the holes are
not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the
engine's exhaust can get into the vehicle as well as dirt
and water. See “Carbon Monoxide” under Engine
Exhaust on page 3‑42.
A: Body to Ground Distance
B: Front of Vehicle
Safety Chains
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
If a step-bumper hitch will be used, the bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample
room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer
and the bumper.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least
75 percent of the vehicle's Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in the
section. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following
driving conditions:
Tow/Haul Mode
Pressing this button at
the end of the shift lever
turns on and off the
tow/haul mode.
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load through rolling terrain.
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in stop and go traffic.
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in busy parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded
or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/
Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer
or a large or heavy load.
This indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster comes on when
the tow/haul mode is on.
Trailer Brakes
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode on
page 3‑36 for more information.
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1,500 lbs
(680 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they
are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for
the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling
and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And
always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by
itself.
Driving with a Trailer
WARNING:
{
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
and make necessary repairs before starting
a trip.
.
Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch,
Following Distance
or rear-most window open.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑42
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passing
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers
are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand
to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Driving On Grades
Making Turns
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine
is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar
to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
while parked, preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes
before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating on page 6‑32.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
Parking on Hills
.
start the engine,
WARNING:
{
.
shift into a gear, and
.
release the parking brake.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on
a flat surface.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
If parking the rig on a hill:
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See this manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these
before and during the trip.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift the
transmission into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into
the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing
uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Red/Black Stripe: Battery Feed (30A Fuse)
Trailer Wiring Harness
Brown: Trailer Park Lamp Supply Voltage
(15A fuse)**
The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring package includes
a wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector at the rear
of the vehicle and a four-wire harness assembly under
the driver side of the instrument panel. The four-wire
harness assembly comes without a connector.
.
Yellow: Left Rear Stop and Turn Signal *
The four-wire harness (without connector) contains the
following circuits:
.
If the vehicle does not have a trailer hitch, the
seven-wire harness assembly with connector is taped
together and located in a frame pocket at the driver side
rear left corner of the frame.
Black: Ground
.
Red/White: Battery Feed
.
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal
.
Light Blue: CHMSL/Stoplamp Supply Voltage
If the vehicle has a trailer hitch, the seven-wire harness
assembly with connector is attached to a bracket on the
hitch platform. In both cases, the seven-wire harness
has a connector and includes a 30-amp feed wire.
* If the vehicle is a cutaway with trailer provisions, a
15 amp fuse will be shared for both left/stop trailer turn
and right/stop trailer turn signals. However, the cutaway
lighting connector will have a 10 amp fuse for each
signal.
The seven-wire harness connector contains the
following trailer circuits:
.
** If the vehicle is a cutaway with trailer provisions, a
15 amp fuse will be shared for trailer park lamps and
cutaway rear lighting connector park lamps. Also, a
10 amp fuse will be shared for trailer back-up lamps
and cutaway rear lighting connector back-up lamps.
Light Green: Back-up Lamps (10A fuse)**
.
White: Ground
.
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal
.
Dark Green: Right Rear Stop and Turn Signal*
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Engine Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Dual Tire Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Tampering with Noise Control System
Prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . 6-51
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑79.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
WARNING:
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many
fluids, and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
{
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8‑17.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑78.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work performed. See
Maintenance Record on page 7‑15.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
For diesel engine vehicles, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual.
For vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this.
Gasoline
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6‑105.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the 4.8LV8 engine (VIN Code A), the
5.3LV8 engine (VIN Code 4), or the 6.0LV8 engine
(VIN Code G) and the N15 flexible fuel option, you can
use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 6‑8. For all other gasoline
engines, use only regular unleaded gasoline.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could
turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑30. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock, might be heard when driving. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If heavy knocking is heard when
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN/
CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 6‑7 for additional
information.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit‐related problems.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6‑105.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
If the vehicle has the 4.8L V8 engine (VIN Code A), the
5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 4), or the 6.0L V8 engine
(VIN Code G) and the N15 flexible fuel option, you can
use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing
up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel on page 6‑6. For
all other gasoline engines, use only the unleaded
gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
page 6‑7
.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Only vehicles that have the 4.8L V8 engine
(VIN Code A), the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 4), or
the 6.0L V8 engine (VIN Code G) and the N15 flexible
fuel option can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). We
encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed
to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” fuel,
meaning it is made from renewable sources such as
corn and
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank
can improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 0°C (32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best not
to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85.
If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you add
as much fuel as possible — do not add less than
11 L (three gallons) when refueling. You should drive
the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
11 km (seven miles) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the
change in ethanol concentration.
other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U.S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that do
have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol
content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you
will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using
E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the
Tank on page 6‑10.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by
additives would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not
properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
WARNING: (Continued)
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
The tethered fuel cap is
located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver
side of the vehicle.
Filling the Tank
WARNING:
{
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be
yellow and state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 6‑8.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
(Continued)
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for
you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
on page 4‑30
.
Your Vehicle on page 6‑101
.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑30.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING:
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{
WARNING:
{
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
Things that burn can get on hot engine or fuel
operated heater (FOH) parts and start a fire.
These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake
fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned.
Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn
onto a hot engine or fuel operated heater (FOH).
.
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling is
complete.
.
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located in front of the
driver's side door frame
near the floor.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up the
secondary hood release, which is located
underneath the middle of the hood.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in
the hood.
If your vehicle has an underhood lamp, it will
automatically come on and stay on until the hood
is closed.
Before closing the hood, be sure all of the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Let the hood
down and close it firmly.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Overview
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX® Diesel manual.
When the hood is lifted:
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Battery. See Battery on page 6‑39.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑16.
B. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on
page 6‑26
C. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System on
page 6‑26
.
G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter on page 6‑19.
.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 6‑35.
D. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on
page 6‑20 or Automatic Transmission Fluid
(6-Speed Transmission) on page 6‑23.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑36.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑16.
page 6‑35.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
For diesel engine vehicles, see “Engine Oil” in the
DURAMAX® Diesel manual.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑113.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑14
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
.
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
Cold Temperature Operation
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil
to Use” for more information.
.
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
1 000 km (600 miles). It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life system might not indicate
that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people
who will perform this work using genuine parts and
reset the system. It is also important to check the oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned
on, reset the system.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44
.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
slowly three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the message comes back on when the vehicle is
started, the engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat
the procedure. If it still does not reset, see your dealer/
retailer for service.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located near the center of
the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑14 for more information on
location.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
Make sure that the filter fits properly into the
housing.
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
5. Reinstall the cover and fasten the retaining clips.
WARNING:
{
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not drive with the
air cleaner/filter off.
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required. Never use compressed air to clean
the filter.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily
get into the engine, which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Unhook the retainer clips and remove the cover.
2. Lift the filter out of the engine air cleaner/filter
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little
dirt as possible.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(4-Speed Transmission)
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information.
3. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter housing.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
.
When outside temperatures are above
32°C (90°F).
.
At high speed for quite a while.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3, and be sure to
use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C (180°F
to 200°F).
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24 km
(15 miles) when outside temperatures are above 10°C
(50°F). If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), drive the vehicle
in D (DRIVE) until the engine temperature gauge moves
and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run
at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F
(10°C) or more. If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), you may
have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be
low during this cold check, you must check the fluid hot
before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will give you
a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Fluid Level
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
more information on location.
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes
or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD
area for a cold check or in the HOT or
cross-hatched area for a hot check. Be sure to
keep the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate
reading.
The transmission
dipstick is located near
the center of the engine
compartment and will be
labeled with the graphic
shown.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(6-Speed Transmission)
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick
tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is
hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid
level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring
the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does not
take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Do
not overfill.
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission
fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a
transmission leak or overheating the transmission. If a
small leak is suspected, use the following procedures to
check the fluid level. However, if there is a large leak,
then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a
dealer/retailer service department and have it repaired
before driving the vehicle further.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3, and be sure to
use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
.
Because this operation can be difficult, it is
recommended to have this check done at the dealer/
retailer service department, which can monitor the
transmission temperature. The transmission fluid level
increases with temperature. To obtain a highly accurate
fluid level check, the transmission temperature must be
measured.
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If it is decided to check the fluid level, be sure to follow
all the instructions here, or a false reading on the
dipstick may occur.
Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside
temperatures is between 15°C to 32°C (60°F to 90°F).
Should the fluid level be low during this cold check, the
fluid must be checked Warm or Hot before adding fluid.
If the outside temperature is colder than 15°C (60°F) or
hotter than 32°C (90°F), a cold check cannot be
performed.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
A warm fluid level check can be performed by driving
the vehicle under lightly loaded conditions and outside
temperatures between 10°C to 27°C (50°F to 80°F).
The vehicle should be driven for at least 15 miles before
performing a warm check. Checking the fluid Warm or
Hot will give a more accurate reading of the fluid level
than a cold check.
Wait at least 30 minutes with the engine Off, before
checking the transmission fluid level if the vehicle has
been driven:
.
In hot weather, when outside temperatures are
Because the vehicle is equipped with a high-efficiency
air-to-oil cooler, the transmission fluid temperature may
not reach the required Hot fluid level checking
temperature under normal lightly loaded driving vehicle
conditions.
above 32°C (90°F).
.
The vehicle is heavily loaded.
.
At high speed for quite a while in hot weather.
.
In heavy traffic and hot weather.
.
Checking the Fluid Level
While pulling a trailer.
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
After driving under these conditions, a hot check can be
performed. The fluid should be Hot, which is 71°C to
93°C (160°F to 200°F).
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
A cold fluid level check can be performed after
the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more
with the engine Off, but this is used only as a reference.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in P (Park).
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever
through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. When M is reached,
move the selector from M1 through M3. Then,
position the shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for two minutes or more.
Then, without shutting Off the engine:
The transmission dipstick
is located near the center
of the engine
compartment and will be
labeled with the graphic
shown.
A. COLD Range
B. WARM Range
C. HOT Range
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
COLD (A) range for a cold check, transmission
temperature 27°C to 32°C (80°F to 90°F), between
the COLD (A) and HOT (C) range for a WARM (B)
check, 50°C to 60°C (122°F to 140°F) or in the
HOT (C) cross-hatched range for a hot check,
71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F). Be sure to keep
the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate
reading.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid”, earlier in this
section for instructions on driving to achieve warm or
hot transmission fluid. It does not take much fluid,
generally less than 0.5 L (one pint). Do not overfill.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
.
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
A. WARM Range
B. HOT Range
Cooling System
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Van Models”
under “Cooling System” in the DURAMAX® Diesel
Supplement.
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick
tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is
warm or hot. A cold check is used only as a reference.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the middle of the WARM (A)
or HOT (B) range depending on the ambient
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
temperature and prior driving conditions. Refer to “How
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Heater, fuel operated heater (FOH), radiator
hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot.
Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL may
cause premature engine, heater core, radiator and
fuel operated heater (FOH) corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever
occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free)
coolant in your vehicle.
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
WARNING:
{
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
.
Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑32.
engine temperature.
.
Protects against rust and corrosion.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
What to Use
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
WARNING:
{
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11 for more information.
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
How to Add Coolant to the Recovery
Tank for Gasoline Engines
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “How to Add
Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank” under “Van
Models” in the Cooling System section of the
DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement for the proper coolant
fill procedure.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the COLD FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before this is done.
WARNING:
{
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the COLD FILL mark. If it is not, there could
be a leak in the cooling system.
If the coolant is low, add the coolant or take the vehicle
to a dealer/retailer for service.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “How to Add
Coolant to the Radiator” under “Van Models” in the
Cooling System section of the DURAMAX® Diesel
Supplement for the proper radiator fill procedure.
WARNING:
{
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
WARNING:
{
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn
the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it
first stops. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 6‑28 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
FILL mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information.
The vehicle has an indicator to warn of engine
overheating.
You will find an engine coolant temperature gauge on
your vehicle's instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 4‑29 for more
information.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑8.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
If you do decide to lift the hood , make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the
engine and have the vehicle serviced.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
WARNING: (Continued)
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being
driven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
WARNING:
{
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is
no sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
.
Tows a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑30.
(Continued)
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages, so you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling
is not required and the clutch partially disengages.
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
reservoir is located in the
engine compartment on
the driver's side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑14 for
5. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid
level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the COLD FILL mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.
reservoir location.
To prevent contamination of brake fluid, never check or
fill the power steering reservoir with the brake master
cylinder cover off.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Washer Fluid
Brakes
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the tank
is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑14 for
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑14
for the location of the
reservoir.
reservoir location.
Notice:
.
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
adding water.
.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage the washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system. Also, water does
not clean as well as washer fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
.
The brake fluid level goes down because of
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes back up.
.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
.
A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or
later the brakes will not work well.
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
windshield washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer system and
paint.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Checking Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to see if
there is a leak.
WARNING:
{
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and/or fuel operated heater parts,
if equipped. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and
a fuel operated heater, see “Fuel Operated Heater
(FOH)” in the diesel engine supplement. The fluid
will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and the vehicle could be
damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done
on the brake hydraulic system. See “Checking
Brake Fluid” in this section.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3
.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11
.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new
pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when
applying the brake pedal firmly.
WARNING:
{
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
WARNING:
{
Notice:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear warning sound
is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
.
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system
can damage brake hydraulic system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do
not let someone put in the wrong kind of
fluid.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑113.
immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑101
.
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Battery
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for battery
location.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
DANGER:
{
Brake Adjustment
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Every brake stop, the brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake
parts are installed.
Vehicle Storage
WARNING:
{
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on page 6‑40 for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by
the warranty.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
Jump Starting
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
If the vehicle battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
Notice: If the other vehicle's system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you do not want. You would not
be able to start your vehicle, and the bad
WARNING:
{
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
grounding could damage the electrical systems.
.
They contain acid that can burn you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located on the
engine drive bracket on all V8 engines and is
marked GND (Ground).
On V6 engines the remote negative (−) terminal is
located on a tab attached to the engine accessory
drive bracket and is marked GND (Ground).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. And it could save the radio!
WARNING:
{
Using an open flame near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located behind a
red plastic cover near the engine accessory drive
bracket on the driver's side of the engine
compartment, below the alternator. To uncover the
remote positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic
cover.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do not
touch each other or other metal.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal for this purpose. It is
marked GND.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
All-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems
that need lubrication.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you'll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑11.
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have the 1500 Series, the proper level is from
5/8 inch (15 mm) to 1 5/8 inch (40 mm) below the
bottom of the filler plug hole. The proper level for the
2500 and 3500 Series is from 0 to 1/4 (6 mm) below the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to
reach the proper level.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑11.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑11.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Noise Control System
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you may need to
add some lubricant.
Tampering with Noise Control
System Prohibited
The following information relates to compliance with
federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule
provides information on maintaining the noise control
system to minimize degradation of the noise emission
control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise
control system warranty is given in your warranty
booklet.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 3/8 inch (10 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof:
Fan and Drive:
.
Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one,
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any
person, other than for purposes of maintenance,
repair or replacement, of any device or element of
design incorporated into any new vehicle for the
purpose of noise control, prior to its sale or delivery
to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
or rendering clutch inoperative.
.
Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle has one.
Air Intake:
.
Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
Modification of the air cleaner.
.
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element
of design has been removed or rendered
inoperative by any person.
Exhaust:
.
Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
.
Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe
clamps.
Insulation:
Fuel Operated Heater (FOH) — Diesel
Engine:
.
Removal of the noise shields or any underhood
insulation.
.
Removal of the muffler.
Engine:
.
Removal or rendering engine speed governor,
if the vehicle has one, inoperative so as to allow
engine speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6‑54.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
WARNING:
{
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
3. Remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp
assembly. To remove the pins, turn the outer pin
clockwise and pull it straight up. To remove the
inner pin, turn it counterclockwise and pull it
straight up.
Headlamps
To remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle and
access the bulbs:
4. Lift the inboard side of the headlamp to release the
inboard tab from the radiator support.
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑13
5. Lift the outboard side of the headlamp to release
the outboard tab from the radiator support.
for more information.
2. Remove the two bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Lower the headlamp to allow the vertical adjustor
to clear the tie bar.
7. Turn the headlamp forward and upward to remove
it from the grille.
8. Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise and pull
it out of the housing.
9. Without removing the headlamp assembly itself,
remove the bulb socket from the back of the
headlamp on the driver's side.
10. Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter turn to
remove it from the socket.
11. On the passenger's side, turn the bulb clockwise
one turn.
12. Install the new bulb into the socket then reinstall it
into the headlamp assembly.
13. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the lamp from the grille.
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
4. Squeeze the tab on the side of the bulb socket
while turning it counterclockwise.
To replace the front turn signal, sidemarker and/or
parking lamp bulb(s):
5. Remove the bulb socket from the back of the lamp
assembly.
6. Replace the bulb.
7. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall it in the
lamp assembly.
1. Use a small tool to unlatch the outboard clip on
the lamp.
2. Pull the lamp forward to completely unlatch the
clip. Move the lamp to the outboard side to loosen
the tabs.
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the bulb clockwise one quarter turn to install it
in the socket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
5. Reinstall the CHMSL assembly and two screws.
The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) is
located above the rear doors at the center of the
vehicle.
Do not block or damage the CHMSL when items are
loaded on the roof of the vehicle.
To replace a bulb:
Taillamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Remove the two
inboard nuts from the
inside of the taillamp
assembly.
1. Remove the two screws from the CHMSL
assembly.
2. Remove the CHMSL assembly.
2. Pull the taillamp assembly straight back to clear
the studs.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter turn to
remove it from the socket.
3. Slide the taillamp assembly slightly upward to
release the lower clip.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Remove the three nuts on the taillamp assembly.
5. Remove the taillamp assembly from the vehicle.
7. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Turn the bulb clockwise to install it in the socket.
9. Reinstall the bulb socket by squeezing the tab
while turning it clockwise.
10. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and three nuts on
the vehicle.
11. Slide the taillamp slightly downward to reengage
the lower clip.
12. Push the taillamp straight forward to reengage the
studs.
13. Reinstall the two inboard nuts from the inside of
the taillamp assembly.
6. Remove the bulb socket by squeezing the tab on
the side of the socket while turning it
counterclockwise.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Remove the two screws (C) securing the license
plate bulb assembly (B).
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
2. Turn the bulb socket (A) counterclockwise and pull
the bulb straight out of the socket.
3. Install the new bulb.
4. Reverse steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the license plate
bulb assembly.
A. Bulb Socket
B. License Plate Bulb Assembly
C. Screws
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Bulbs
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 7‑3 for more information on wiper blade
inspection.
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up, Rear Parking, Stoplamp,
and Turn Signal Lamp
3157
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL)
912
Front Parking and Turn
Signal Lamp
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. To remove the type with a
release clip, do the following:
3157KX
Front Sidemarker Lamp
License Plate Lamp
Headlamps
194
194
1. Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical
position.
Composite High-Beam
Headlamp
9005
Composite Low-Beam
Headlamp
9006GS
H6054
Sealed Beam Headlamp
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the notched
end last, into the end with two blade claws. Then
slide the insert all the way through the blade claws
at the opposite end.
5. Make sure that the notches are locked by the
bottom claws. Make sure that all other claws are
properly locked on both sides of the insert slot.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull it up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
into the windshield.
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
3. The insert has two notches at one end that are
locked by bottom claws of the blade assembly. At
the notched end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
WARNING: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and
where to obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer.
.
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle's
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
WARNING:
{
Pressure on page 6‑64
.
.
.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
.
Overloading your vehicle's tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire's tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle's tires have been damaged,
replace them.
Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
(Continued)
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P‐Metric and a LT‐Metric tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information,
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑77
.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑64 and
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines. This does not apply to
Goodyear LT225/75R16 G949 RSA and Goodyear
LT225/75R16 G933 RSD commercial truck tires.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended tire
pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑64
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
andLoading the Vehicle on page 5‑19.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
page 6‑64 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high as it
is wide.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire
(A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size
means a light truck tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT‐Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Load Range: Load Range.
(G) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load index and speed rating of
a tire. If two numbers are given as in the example,
120/116, then this represents the load index for
single versus dual wheel usage (single/dual).
The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is
certified to carry a load. This does not apply to
Goodyear LT225/75R16 G949 RSA and Goodyear
LT225/75R16 G933 RSD commercial truck tires;
see the dual tire and single tire maximum load
and load range letter designations on the tire
sidewall.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
page 6‑64
.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑64 and Loading
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
the Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
page 5‑19
.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/
or model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
the tire.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑74
.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under‐inflation or over‐inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under‐inflation), you can get the following:
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire's
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
.
Too much flexing
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑77
.
.
Premature or irregular wear
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading the
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
If your tires have too much air (over‐inflation),
you can get the following:
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
.
Unusual wear
.
Poor handling
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from road hazards
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑19
.
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
tire. See Spare Tire on page 6‑97 for additional
information.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even
when they are underinflated. Check the tire's
inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold
means your vehicle has been sitting for at
least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19 . How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears
faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more
evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑71. Also
see Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low,
add air until you reach the recommended amount.
WARNING:
{
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is badly
underinflated, the tire can overheat. An
overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Be sure all tires
(including the spare) are properly inflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
See Tires on page 6‑56 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑64 for more information on proper tire
inflation.
Dual Tire Operation
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel
bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut
torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km) of driving. For proper wheel nut tightening
information, see “Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire” later in this section, under Changing a
Flat Tire on page 6‑82. Also see “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑113.
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under‐inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under‐inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑68 for
additional information.
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. If your vehicle has DIC buttons, tire pressure
levels can be viewed by the driver. For additional
information and details about the DIC operation and
displays see DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑37
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑44.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle's tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle's original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle's tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑19, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑64.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS will illuminate the
low tire pressure warning
symbol located on the
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑71 and Tires on page 6‑56.
instrument panel cluster.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for
your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6‑75
.
.
One of the road tires has been replaced with the
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re‐install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service
if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes
on and stays on.
.
The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the
TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle's tires or replace one
or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter's LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the
same time for approximately five seconds. The
horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in
relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
message displays on the DIC screen.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire's air
pressure. If increasing the tire's air pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire's sidewall.
If your vehicle does not have RKE, press the
Driver Information Center (DIC) vehicle information
button until the PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE
POSITIONS message displays. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on
the DIC screen.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gauge, or a key.
If your vehicle does not have RKE or DIC buttons,
press the trip odometer reset stem located on the
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/
wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over.
instrument panel cluster until the PRESS V TO
RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays.
The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in
relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
message displays on the DIC screen.
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Inspect tires regularly for signs of wear or
damage. Also inspect the spare tire. For more
information on tire inspection, see When It Is Time
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that
the sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire and wheel position.
for New Tires on page 6‑74
.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
on page 7‑3
.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that the vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new. The first
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and that the
TPMS sensor matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on
the DIC display screen goes off.
rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3
.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on page 6‑74
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
and Wheel Replacement on page 6‑79
.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Single Rear Wheels
Dual Rear Wheels
If your vehicle has single rear wheels, always use
the correct rotation pattern shown here when
rotating the vehicle's tires. Do not include the
spare tire in the tire rotation.
If the vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread
design for the front tires is the same as the rear
tires, always use one of the correct rotation
patterns shown here when rotating the tires.
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑64 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑19 . Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑113
.
WARNING:
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later,
If the vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread
design for the front tires is different from the dual
rear tires, always use the correct rotation pattern
shown here when rotating the tires. The dual tires
are rotated as a pair and the inside rear tires
become the outside rear tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure that vent
holes in the inner and outer wheels on each side
are lined up.
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑82
.
Also see Dual Tire Operation on page 6‑66 for
additional information.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), reset the TPMS sensors after
rotating the tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 6‑68
.
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tires do not have treadwear indicators, replace the tires
when the tread depth is down to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for
the front tires, or 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for the rear tires.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or
Spare Tire and Tools on page 6‑96
.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire's rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
.
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
indicators, which appear
when your tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less
of tread remaining.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
Some commercial truck tires, including Goodyear
LT225/75R16 G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225/75R16
G933 RSD, may not have treadwear indicators. If the
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four (or six if
your vehicle has dual rear wheels). This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your
vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were
new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the
braking and handling performance of your vehicle. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑71 for
information on proper tire rotation.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
WARNING:
{
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all‐season tread design, the
TPC spec number will be followed by a MS, for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6‑57 for
additional information.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure
to use the correct size, brand, and type of
tires on your vehicle's wheels.
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
WARNING:
{
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti‐lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
WARNING:
{
If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are
the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias‐belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not recommended
for those wheels are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may give a low‐pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑67.
Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑19, for more information about the
Tire and Loading Information label and its location on
your vehicle.
See Buying New Tires on page 6‑75 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6‑4 for additional
information.
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal
Safety Requirements In Addition To These
Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Temperature – A, B, C
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be
necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or
the other, the alignment might need to be checked.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper
diagnosis.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
WARNING:
{
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
If you need to replace any of the wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for the vehicle.
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced
on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque after
100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑113.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑82 for more
information.
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING:
{
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not
spin the vehicle's wheels.
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
WARNING:
{
Notice: If your vehicle does not have dual wheels
and has a tire size other than P245/70R17 or LT245/
75R16, use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use chains that are the proper size
for your tires. Install them on the tires of the rear
axle. Do not use chains on the tires of the front axle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If your vehicle has dual wheels or P245/70R17 or
LT245/75R16 size tires, do not use tire chains.
They can damage your vehicle because there is
not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a
vehicle without the proper amount of clearance
can cause damage to the brakes, suspension,
or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a
crash.
(Continued)
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
WARNING:
{
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle's tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for
changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks (A).
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3
.
WARNING:
{
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
If you have a van with the 15‐passenger seating
arrangement, the equipment you will need is secured on
the rear floor of the passenger side of the vehicle.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
If you have a cargo van or a passenger van, the
equipment you will need is located in the passenger
side rear corner of the vehicle.
To access the equipment, remove the retaining wing
bolt and lift it out of the mounting bracket.
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it off of the
mounting bracket.
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To lower the spare tire from the vehicle:
The tools you will be using include the jack (A), jack
handle (B), hoist extension (C), jack handle
extension (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
A. Spare Tire
E. Hoist Shaft
B. Tire/Wheel Retainer
C. Hoist Cable
F. Jack Handle and
Hoist Extensions
The spare tire is mounted in the rear underbody of the
vehicle.
G. Wheel Wrench
D. Hoist Assembly
You will use the hoist extension, the jack handle
extensions and the wheel wrench to remove the
underbody‐mounted spare tire.
6-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to
lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 6‑93.
1. Assemble the wheel wrench (G) to one or two of
the jack handle extensions and the hoist extension.
Insert the hoist extension end through the hole in
the rear bumper.
4. When the tire has been lowered, pull the tire
toward you so you can reach the tire retainer and
pull it up through the wheel opening.
2. Be sure the hoist extension end connects to the
hoist shaft (E). The chiseled end of the extension is
used to lower the spare tire.
If you have a vehicle which was completed from a
cab and chassis, refer to the information from body
supplier/installer.
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the
wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle.
The spare tire is a full‐size tire, like the other tires
on the vehicle.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Assemble the jack and tools:
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
If your vehicle has plastic wheel nut caps, loosen them
by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. The
wheel nut caps are designed to remain with the center
cap. Remove the center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the chisel
end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently pry it out.
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑82 for more
information.
2. Loosen all the wheel nuts with the wheel wrench.
Do not remove them yet.
Front Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together with the
jack handle (B), 1 or 2 jack handle extensions (D)
and the wheel wrench (E).
Rear Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together with the
jack handle (B), 2 jack handle extensions (D), and
the wheel wrench (E).
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Position
Front Position
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Position
Rear Alternative Position (Diesel Vehicles)
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.
The front position jacking point is on the frame.
The rear position jacking point is on the rear axle.
If the exhaust system interferes in the jack location
in the rear axle, such as in Diesel vehicles, place
the jack (A) on the rear axle between the axle
housing and the shock absorber bracket in order to
avoid any interference with the exhaust pipe (B).
6-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
to fit.
WARNING:
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
6. Remove all the
wheel nuts.
WARNING:
{
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
7. Take flat tire off of the mounting surface.
6-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
WARNING:
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑82
.
WARNING:
{
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
6-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
WARNING:
{
rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each wheel nut
by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.
If wheel studs are damaged, they can break. If all
the studs on a wheel broke, the wheel could come
off and cause a crash. If any stud is damaged
because of a loose-running wheel, it could be that
all of the studs are damaged. To be sure, replace
all studs on the wheel. If the stud holes in a wheel
have become larger, the wheel could collapse in
operation. Replace any wheel if its stud holes
have become larger or distorted in any way.
Inspect hubs and hub‐piloted wheels for damage.
Because of loose running wheels, piloting pad
damage may occur and require replacement of
the entire hub, for proper centering of the wheels.
When replacing studs, hubs, wheel nuts or
wheels, be sure to use GM original equipment
parts.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
WARNING:
{
Wheel nuts that are not tight can work loose. If all
the nuts on a wheel come off, the wheel can come
off the vehicle, causing a crash. All wheel nuts
must be properly tightened. Follow the rules in this
section to be sure they are.
6-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑113 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
11. Use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts firmly.
Turn the wheel wrench clockwise and in a
crisscross sequence as shown.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑113 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
12. Put the wheel cover or the center cap and plastic
wheel nut caps back on. Remove any wheel
blocks.
Have a technician check the wheel nut tightness of
all wheels with a torque wrench after the first
100 miles (160 km) and then 1,000 miles
(1600 km) after that. Repeat this service whenever
you have a tire removed or serviced. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑113 for
more information.
6-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off
the vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is
damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must
be stowed with the valve stem pointing down.
WARNING:
{
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from under the spare.
See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on
page 6‑96 for instructions on storing the spare tire
correctly.
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible.
WARNING:
{
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly and
you and others could get hurt. Read and follow
the instructions listed next.
If the cable is not
visible, start this
procedure at Step 6.
6-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Turn the hoist extension counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is
exposed.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire and turn the
handle clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the
secondary latch spring.
3. Attach the jack handle/jack handle extension and
wheel wrench to the jack .
5. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. This lets
you know that the secondary latch has released.
The spare tire is now balancing on the jack.
6-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the
cable.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
7. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
9. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper
clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable,
assembly the wheel wrench onto the hoist
extension and insert the chisel end of the hoist
extension into the hoist shaft hole above the
bumper. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise
to lower the spare the rest of the way.
To continue changing the flat tire, return to Step 4 of
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on
page 6‑86
.
8. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
6-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
WARNING:
{
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Pull the retaining bar through the center of the
wheel, making sure it is properly attached.
3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of the vehicle,
keeping the cable tight.
4. Put the chisel end of the hoist extension on an
angle through the hole in the rear door frame,
above the bumper.
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until
the tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare
tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
6-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare Tire
This vehicle, when new, may have had a fully-inflated
spare tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check
its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑64 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑19 for information regarding proper tire inflation
and loading the vehicle. For instruction on how to
remove, install or store a spare tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 6‑86
and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on
page 6‑96
.
After installing the spare tire on the vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h) at the recommended
inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto the vehicle.
This way, a spare tire will be available in case you need
it again. Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,
because they will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its
wheel together.
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
You will hear two clicks when the tire is up all
the way.
7. Return the jacking equipment to the proper
location. Secure the items and replace the jack
cover.
6-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils
should be removed as quickly as possible. The
vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat that
could cause stains to set rapidly.
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle's breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning the vehicle's
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the
vehicle's doors and windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle's interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
6-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle's
upholstery and clean the vehicle's glass can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any
soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the
soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
Do not clean the vehicle using:
.
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
.
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
.
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper
towel until no more can be removed.
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
.
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
.
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
.
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle's interior.
6-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To clean:
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that
was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
6-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
WARNING:
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers'
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11
.
6-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
page 6‑101
.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
6-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
.
Snow and ice, without proper removal
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use
only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
6-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on
the vehicle.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing
system can do this.
6-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Vehicle Identification
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.
6-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and
replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑113 for the
vehicle's engine code.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer/retailer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle
and the damage would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, on the front passenger door frame, has the
following information:
.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑78 and
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
page 2‑79
.
6-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the engine
compartment fuse block. An electrical overload will
cause the lamps to flicker on and off, or in some cases
to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp
wiring checked right away.
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload,
overload due to heavy snow, etc., may cause wiper
linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from
the windshield before using the windshield wipers. If the
overload is caused by some electrical problem and not
snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Floor Console Fuse Block
The floor console fuse block is located under the
driver seat.
6-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mini‐Fuse
F1
Usage
Empty
F2
Steering Wheel Sensor
Auxiliary Parking Lamps (Cut‐Away)
Front Park Lamps
Trailer Park Lamps
Upfitter Park Lamps
Right Rear Park Lamp
Left Rear Park Lamp
Outside Rear View Mirror Switch
Airbag/AOS
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
Empty
Empty
Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning 2
F13
F14
Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning 1
6-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mini‐Fuse
F15
Usage
Mini‐Fuse
F32
Usage
Rear Door Lock
Empty
F17
Outside Rear View Mirror Heater
Rear Window Defogger
Compass
F33
Cargo Door Unlock
Passenger Door Unlock
Rear Passenger Door Unlock
Driver Door Unlock
Empty
F18
F34
F19
F35
F20
Radio/Chime
F36
Remote Function Actuator/Tire
Pressure Monitor
F37
F21
F38
Empty
Ignition Switch/Discrete Logic Ignition
Sensor (PK3)
F22
F23
F25
J‐Case Fuse
Usage
Upfitter Auxiliary 1
Empty
Instrument Panel Cluster
F16
F24
F28
F29
Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning Control
Upfitter Auxiliary 2 Reading Lamps
Rear Blower
F26
F27
F30
F31
Auxiliary/Trailer Backup
Tail Lamps Backup
Upfitter Courtesy Lamps
Front Door Lock
6-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
K1
Usage
Run (High Current Micro)
K2
Empty (High Current Micro)
K3
Park Lamps (High Current Micro)
Upfitter Auxiliary 2 (High Current Mini)
Rear Defogger (High Current Micro)
K4
K5
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
(High Current Micro)
K6
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Power Seats
CB1
CB2
Power Windows
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The fuse block is located in the engine compartment on
the driver side of the vehicle.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
6-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mini Fuse
Usage
Right Stop/Turn Trailer
Spare
Mini Fuse
Usage
Body Control Module 3
Special Equipment Option
Airbag
3
26
27
28
29
4
5
Spare
6
Fuel System Control Module Ignition
Body Control Module 5
Body Control Module 7
Body Control Module 4
Instrument Panel Cluster
Trailer Wiring
Steering Wheel Sensor
7
Engine Control Module Ignition/Glow
Plug Module
30
8
31
32
33
34
35
36
51
52
53
54
55
56
58
59
61
62
Transmission Control Module Ignition
Transmission Control Module Battery
Spare
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Spare
Spare
Fuel Operated Heater Module
Spare
Brake Switch
Windshield Washer
Horn
Left high Beam Headlamp
Right High Beam Headlamp
Left Low Beam Headlamp
Right Low Beam Headlamp
Wiper
Transmission
Air Conditioning Compressor
Engine Control Module Battery
Spare
Canister Vent Solenoid
Body Control Module 2
Body Control Module 1
Spare
Left Stop/Turn Trailer
Spare
Spare
Fuel Pump
Oxygen Sensor 2 (Post)
Auxiliary Power Outlet
6-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mini Fuse
Usage
Fan Clutch (EV)
J‐Case Fuse
Usage
63
64
65
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
74
Spare
Mass Air Flow/Canister/LAMBDA
Odd Ignition/Injectors
Trailer Wiring
Fan High
Daytime Running Lamps 2
(LOLVL‐V22)
Starter Solenoid
66
67
Engine Control Module/Powertrain
Fuel System Control Module Battery
Fan Lo
Daytime Running Lamps 1
(LOLVL‐V22)
68
69
70
71
72
73
75
76
77
78
79
Auxiliary Stop Lamps
Spare
Front Blower
Spare
Relay
15
Usage
Run/Crank
Fuel Heater
Body Control Module 6
Lighter/Data Link Connection
V6 Fuel Injectors
Spare
37
Spare
38
Fuel Pump
39
Crank
40
Air Conditioning Compressor
Fan High
Oxygen Sensor 2 (Pre)
Engine Control Module Powertrain
Even Ignition/Injectors
48
49
Powertrain
50
Fan Clutch (EV)
Fan Low
57
J‐Case Fuse
Usage
ABS Motor
60
Fan Control
1
2
ABS Module
6-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information.
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑11 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System without Rear Heat
4.3L V6
9.5 L
11.8 L
13.1 L
10.0 qt
12.4 qt
13.8 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8
6.0L V8
Cooling System with Rear Heat
4.3L V6
12.3 L
14.6 L
16.1 L
13.0 qt
15.4 qt
17.0 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8
6.0L V8
6-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6
4.3 L
5.7 L
4.5 qt
6.0 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8, 6.0L V8
Fuel Tank
Cutaway (Optional Tank)*
215.7 L
124.9 L
117.3 L
57.0 gal
33.0 gal
31.0 gal
Cutaway (Standard Tank)
Passenger and Cargo
* 159 inch (4 039 mm) wheelbase or 177 inch (4 496 mm) wheelbase only
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
4-SPD 4L60-E
6-SPD 6L90
4.7 L
6.0 L
5.0 qt
6.3 qt
Wheel Nut Torque
190 Y
140 ft lb
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
6-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
1.52 mm (0.060 in)
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
4.3L V6
4.8L V8
5.3L V8
6.0L V8
X
A
4
G
6-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
6-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
Maintenance Schedule
.
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑19.
Introduction
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. For diesel engine vehicles, see the
maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX Diesel
manual.
.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6‑7
.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
WARNING:
{
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you
have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6‑5.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in
good working condition, improves fuel economy, and
reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At your General Motors dealer/retailer, you can be
certain that you will receive the highest level of service
available. Your dealer/retailer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine GM replacement
parts, as well as, up to date tools and equipment to
ensure fast and accurate diagnostics.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil Soon
Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑16. An Emission Control Service.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7‑11 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7‑13. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
service is required for the vehicle as soon as possible,
within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the
best conditions, the engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a
year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your
dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who will
perform this work and reset the system. If the engine oil
life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service.
Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service
for new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6‑71.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
The services described for Maintenance I should be
performed at every engine oil change. The services
described for Maintenance II should be
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter on page 6‑19.
performed when:
.
Maintenance I was performed the last time the
Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
engine oil was changed.
.
It has been 10 months or more since the Change
Maintenance II
Engine Oil Soon message has displayed or since
the last service.
.
Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
.
Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear.
Maintenance I
.
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑16. An Emission Control Service.
.
Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage, and rear driveline center splines.
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑28
.
.
Engine cooling system inspection. Visual
inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps
and replacement, if needed.
.
.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑35.
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated.
See Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6‑103
Worn or damaged wiper blade replacement.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
on page 6‑64
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑71.
.
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑71
.
page 6‑54
.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders,
folding seat hardware, and rear compartment
hinges, linkage, and handle pivot points lubrication.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11. More frequent lubrication may be
required when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
Additional Required Services
At the First 160 km/100 Miles, 1 600 km/
1,000 Miles, and 10 000 km/6,000 Miles
.
For vehicles with dual wheels: Check dual wheel
nut torque. For proper torque, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑113.
weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
At Each Fuel Stop
.
.
Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2‑80.
.
Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑16
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑28
.
Automatic transmission fluid level check
and adding fluid, if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on
page 6‑20 or Automatic Transmission Fluid
(6-Speed Transmission) on page 6‑23.
.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑35.
.
.
.
All‐wheel drive vehicles: Transfer case fluid level
check and adding fluid, if needed.
Once a Month
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑64
Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.
.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑71.
Vehicles with diesel engine or GVWR above
4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) only: Shields inspection
for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as
required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable to vehicles sold in the United States
and recommended for vehicles sold in Canada.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once a Year
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.
Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
.
Services on page 7‑9.
Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
.
.
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.
Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑9.
.
Automatic transmission fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy city
traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used
for taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on
page 6‑20 or Automatic Transmission Fluid
(6-Speed Transmission) on page 6‑23.
Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7‑9
.
.
.
Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7‑9.
Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
.
All‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change
(severe service) for vehicles mainly driven when
frequently towing a trailer, or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. Check vent hose at transfer
case for kinks and proper installation. Check to be
sure vent hose is unobstructed, clear, and free of
debris. During any maintenance, if a power washer
is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody,
care should be taken to not directly spray the
transfer case output seals. High pressure water
can overcome the seals and contaminate the
transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer case and
should be replaced.
page 6‑26
.
.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat shields
inspection for loose or damaged components.
Throttle system inspection for interference, binding
or for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have
high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate
accelerator or cruise control cables.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.
Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Evaporative control system inspection. Check all
fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook‐up,
routing, and condition. Check that the purge valve,
if the vehicle has one, works properly. Replace as
needed. An Emission Control Service. The U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency or the California
Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not
nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the vehicle's useful life.
We, however, urge that all recommended
maintenance services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded.
All‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change
(normal service). Check vent hose at transfer
case for kinks and proper installation. Check to be
sure vent hose is unobstructed, clear, and free of
debris. During any maintenance, if a power washer
is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody,
care should be taken to not directly spray the
transfer case output seals. High pressure water
can overcome the seals and contaminate the
transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer case and
should be replaced.
.
Spark plug replacement and spark plug wires
inspection. An Emission Control Service.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
Automatic transmission fluid change (normal
.
Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill,
service). See Automatic Transmission Fluid
(4-Speed Transmission) on page 6‑20 or
Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed
Transmission) on page 6‑23.
cooling system and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning
condenser (or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6‑28
.
An Emission Control Service.
.
Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
Engine coolant level check.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windshield washer fluid level check.
Tire inflation pressures check.
Tire wear inspection.
Rotate tires.
Fluids visual leak check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
Brake system inspection.
Chassis components lubrication.
Steering and suspension inspection.
Engine cooling system inspection.
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
Body components lubrication.
Restraint system components check.
Automatic transmission fluid level check.
All‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid level check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
Shields inspection.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑38.
on page 3‑38
.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for
service.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
.
To check the parking brake's holding ability:
.
The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when
With the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.
the shift lever is in P (Park).
.
The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
.
To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
Hydraulic Brake
System
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Power Steering
System
Engine Oil
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
To determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
DEXRON®‐VI Automatic
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
on page 6‑16
.
Key Lock
Cylinders
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
Engine Coolant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
page 6‑28
.
Chassis
Lubrication
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2,
Category GC or GC-LB
(GM Part No. U.S. 1051344,
in Canada 993037).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Hinges
Front Wheel
Bearings
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678).
DEXRON®‐VI Automatic
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Front and
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
Transmission Fluid.
Synthetic Grease with
Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
One-Piece
Propshaft Slip
Yoke Spline,
Two-Piece
Propshaft
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,
in Canada 10953511).
Slip-in-Tube
Spline
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information.
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained by your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
4.3L V6
15950115
A3097C
25010792
89017524
PF47
PF48
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8, 6.0L V8
Spark Plugs
4.3L V6
12607234
12621258
25949887
41-993
41-110
—
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8, 6.0L V8
Wiper Blades — 22 in (56.0 cm)
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Drive Belt Routing
V8 Engines
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see
V6 Engines
the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customer Assistance for
United States Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . 8-17
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . 8-17
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors
of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer's sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument
panel and visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or
parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership
or the general manager.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada
Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program provides for the review
of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter,
and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in about 70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
.
Digital owner manual, warranty information,
.
and more
My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
.
Online service and maintenance records
.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services
Earnings summaries
.
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts
.
and service estimates, check trade-in values,
or schedule a service appointment by adding
the vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
Other Helpful Links:
.
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
Chevrolet − www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at
its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can
dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your
vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coverage
Roadside Assistance Program
Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first.
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1‐800‐CHEV‐USA
(1‐800‐243‐8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1‐888‐889‐2438).
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
.
Your name, home address, and home telephone
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too
often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
number
.
Telephone number of your location
.
Location of the vehicle
.
Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
.
Description of the problem
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Services Provided
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough
fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service
station.
.
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is provided to unlock
.
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
chains, or other traction devices.
.
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
.
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,
or snow.
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to
change a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare
tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility
for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is
required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year. Additional
travel information is also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 km from where your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how
to receive payment.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/
retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
.
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day
as possible to allow for the same day repair.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation Program
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing
several transportation options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the
following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.
Shuttle Service
The Courtesy transportation program is no longer
available for cutaway vehicles.
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination
with minimal interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one‐way or round trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance parameters of
the dealer's area.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer's
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
.
Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
.
If there has been an injury, call emergency
services for help. Do not leave the scene of a
crash until all matters have been taken care of.
Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in
danger or you are instructed to move it by a police
officer.
.
Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end
of your lease for poor quality repairs.
.
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑8 for more information.
.
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver's name,
the service's name, and the phone number.
.
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you keep
these items in your vehicle.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver's license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance
company and policy number, and a general
description of the damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
.
If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a
copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some
states/provinces with “no fault” insurance laws,
a report may not be necessary. This is especially
true if there are no injuries and both vehicles
are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM
parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you
may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with
Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
If another party's insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Bulletins
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an
order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in
a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules may also store
data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate
of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules
may also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature
settings.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
.
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
.
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
.
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency Statement
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Navigation System
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking
and starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does
not use or record personal information or link with any
other GM system containing personal information.
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Antenna
Fixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Appearance Care
A
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Airbag
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Airbag System
Airbag Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . 2-67
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Airbags
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
i - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Automatic Transmission
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . 6-51
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20, 6-23
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29, 3-34
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
California
B
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Carbon Monoxide
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Brake
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Care of
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
CD, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 6-51
i - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Check
Cleaning (cont.)
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System . . . . . . . 4-18
Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Engine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Information
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 2-55
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 8-17
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
i - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Door (cont.)
D
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
DIC Vehicle Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Driving
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
In Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Dual Tire Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
DIC Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Disc, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Door
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
i - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
E
Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Enhanced Technology Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
EDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Engine
F
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Filter
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Flat Tire, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
i - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20, 6-23
G
Gasoline
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Glass, Enhanced Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
i - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Parking
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
LATCH System for Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Lighting
I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Instrument Panel
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System (ITBC) . . . . 5-30
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
i - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Locks
Airbag Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
M
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
i - 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Mirrors
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Outside Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Outside Towing Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
OnStar, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Outlets
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Outside
Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Towing Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Owners, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
N
Navigation System, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Noise Control System, Tampering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
O
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Off-Road
P
Paint, Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Park
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
i - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking
R
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . .6-5
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Program
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Radios
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System . . . . . . . . 4-18
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Rear Seat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
i - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Replacement Parts
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Restraint System Check
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Seats
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Rear Seat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 2-55
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle . . . 6-6
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
S
Safety Belts
Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Safety Belts Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
i - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Shifting
T
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Tampering with Noise Control System
Prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Swing-Out Side Door, 60/40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Swing-Out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Time, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Dual Tire Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Installing the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
i - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Removing the Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Towing
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
V
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Ventilation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Traction
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20, 6-23
Transmission Operation, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . 3-29, 3-34
i - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Enhanced Technology Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Swing-Out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Windshield
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
W
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Where to Put the Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
i - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|